Yosemite National Park is a breathtaking wonderland nestled in California’s Sierra Nevada mountains, known worldwide for its dramatic granite cliffs, cascading waterfalls, and ancient, towering sequoias. From the moment you enter Yosemite Valley, you’re greeted by a majestic, almost surreal panorama: the sheer face of El Capitan rising nearly 3,000 feet above the valley floor, Half Dome’s iconic silhouette etched against the sky, and the enchanting mist of Bridalveil Fall tumbling down rocky slopes. Don’t let the prospect of adventuring by yourself deter you from seeing these staggering feats of nature. 48 hours in Yosemite is the perfect amount of time to see the most unforgettable sights, go on a few awe-inspiring hikes, and watch a breathtaking sunset or two.
These landscapes are more than scenic—they are a rare, living testament to the power of glaciers, volcanic activity, and tectonic forces that shaped the land over millions of years. Each vista in Yosemite offers a new sense of wonder and awe, combining rugged, untouched beauty with a peaceful serenity that draws millions of visitors each year. It’s no wonder Yosemite is consistently one of the most-visited parks parks in the National Park System!
Fast Facts About Yosemite National Park
Size: 747,956 acres
Visitors: 3,897,070 visitors annually (data from 2023)
Highest elevation: 13,114 feet at Mount Lyell
Closest Airports: Fresno-Yosemite (FAT) and Mammoth Yosemite (MMH) airports are both ~2.5 hour drive to Yosemite Valley; Sacramento Airport (SMF) is ~3.5 hour drive to Yosemite Valley
National Park Initiation: October 1st, 1890 by an Act of Congress (3rd national park in the USA)
Fun Fact: Yosemite is home to three groves of sequoias, and the oldest one— Grizzly Giant— is estimated to be about 3,000 years old
Yosemite’s place in history as one of the first protected landscapes in the world adds to its legacy. In 1864, during the heart of the Civil War, President Abraham Lincoln signed the Yosemite Grant. This made Yosemite Valley and Mariposa Grove the first public land ever set aside by the U.S. government for preservation and public use. This landmark decision was the foundation of the National Park system (NPS).
While Yellowstone is heralded as the first national park, much of the nomenclature used to protect Yellowstone land was modeled after the Yosemite Grant. The big difference? Yosemite is housed entirely in California, whereas Yellowstone occupies regions of Wyoming, Idaho, and Montana. Due to its multi-state occupancy Yellowstone became the first park protected nationally. Yosemite was not long after! In 1890, Yosemite was officially designated as a national park, making it the third in the NPS. Today, it stands not only as a paradise for outdoor enthusiasts and nature lovers but as a symbol of America’s commitment to preserving its most extraordinary natural treasures for future generations.
The Most Wonderful Time of the Year
The most popular time of year to visit is summer into early fall, with the highest visitation in July and August. This time of year, you can expect temperatures to get up into the 80s and 90s, but it will cool off into the 50s in the evening.
Having just visited mid-October, I am a staunch supporter of the slightly-off-season visit! With highs in the 70s, it was perfect for hiking… but not too cold to camp through the evening! No real chance of snow and likelihood of rain is still pretty minimal. The only downside is that the park has dried out some. Mirror Lake becomes more of an enchanting puddle and the Mist Trail is much less likely to soak you, compared to early summer. None of this takes a way from the beauty of the park— just a slightly different experience. Worth it, in my opinion, to deal with almost HALF as many fellow visitors!!
Thou Shall Not Pass
Due to issues with congestion and traffic in the park, a timed reservation system has been implemented at Yosemite. This only is in place during the busy season! In 2024, this was as follows:
4/13 – 6/30
Reservations only required for weekends and holidays from 5 am to 4 pm
7/1 – 8/16
Reservations required daily from 5 am to 4 pm
8/17 – 10/ 13
Reservations only required for weekends and holidays from 5 am to 3 pm
This differs from the $35/vehicle entrance fee everyone pays for admission into the park. The entry fee is enforced year-round as it’s important for preserving and maintaining the park. The timed entry reservation system is completely different! Its sole purpose being to control the influx of people into the park. This is an online reservation system, so there is a $2 fee. You can make your ticketed entry reservations here.
If you have camping or lodging reservations in the park or are on a park-authorized commercial tour, you do not need to worry about securing a timed entry reservation.
Accommodation Station
Yosemite National Park offers a diverse range of lodging options. If you’re looking to stay in the park and enjoy a bit more comfort and style, there’s a few different historic lodge and hotel options. For outdoorsmen (and women) more keen to be surrounded by nature’s simplicity, you actually have two different kinds of options here. There are 13 campgrounds in the park for a “typical” tent-camping experience. There’s also a handful of hybrid camping options including some permanent canvas tents and structures in the backcountry. Regardless of where you’re resting your head, each option brings a unique way to experience Yosemite. There really is a perfect retreat for every kind of adventurer.
As noted above, a nice perk of staying in the park is this precludes you from needing a timed entry pass, if you happen to be visiting during the high season months. Two birds with one stone!
Yosemite will sometimes close down an area for a season to do maintenance. All Lodge and Modified Camping availability is visible using the links below or at travelyosemite.com. Similarly, campground closures and anticipated re-openings can be found at recreation.gov.
* Campsites go like HOTCAKES!!! Campgrounds will be fully booked up weeks in advance, but there’s hope for last minute campers. I snagged 3 nights in the park with less than a week’s notice using Campflare. It’s an app that will let you know when a campsite in a given campground becomes available. Be prepared to act fast though because things do not stay vacant long!
** It’s worth noting, Camp 4 is an awesome campground, but it has a bit more of a hostel feel than other spots in the park, as it’s a shared site campground. Also, you do have to walk your tent and camp items a short distance. Overall it’s a bit less individual or private than other campgrounds in the park, but some people really dig that vibe. All in all, it’s a cheaper campground/campsite (for a solo traveler) at only $10/person/night.
Yosemite Valley Shuttle
Yosemite Valley is a popular area of the park, so to facilitate traffic and parking concerns, there are two shuttle systems within the valley. They both run from 7am to 10pm, hitting the key points of interest, as noted below. Since the East Valley shuttle runs a smaller loop, buses tend to arrive a little more frequently. Even at that, the longest wait time is estimated to be about 22 minutes.
Two Day Itinerary
While I am no stranger to a fun solo adventure, anything more than two or three days starts to feel like a lot of time by my lonesome. That’s just me though! I felt that about 48 hours in Yosemite was the perfect amount of time to experience the park’s highlights without feeling rushed. There’s ample time to explore iconic spots like Yosemite Valley, Glacier Point, and Mariposa Grove— taking in scenic views via a couple moderate-length hikes, a relaxing bike ride, and breathtaking drives.
It’s worth noting, everyone has different comfort levels, but ~8 miles is the most I like to hike by myself. If you are visiting Yosemite with friends or if you feel comfortable going on long hikes solo, Half Dome is one of the most renowned hikes in the park. The ~16 mile trek was a bit much for me to tackle alone, but it is an option! Especially if you’re open to staying a third day!
DAY 1
To make the most of a full day, it does help to arrive in Yosemite the night before. That way, when you wake up, you’re ready to hit the ground running. I stayed at Camp 4, which was very centrally located, but there’s certainly other lodge and campground options in the valley to choose from.
Vernal & Nevada Falls via the Mist Trail
The Vernal and Nevada Falls via the Mist Trail is an awesome hike because it combines breathtaking waterfalls, diverse terrain, and unforgettable views into one memorable hike. This trail takes you up close to the powerful cascades of Vernal Fall and Nevada Fall. A rather immersive experience, the waterfall mist cools off hikers as they ascend, hence the trail’s name. Climbing the granite stair-master-come-to-life alongside Vernal Fall is rather unforgettable, but so worth it as you’re rewarded with sweeping views of Yosemite Valley and the Merced River atop Nevada Falls.
The hike is around 6.5 miles from the trailhead. A heads up/FYI, I ended up parking in Curry Village, which made it more of an 8ish mile hike– just so you’re mentally prepared. It’s certainly not an impossible endeavor, but the 2,208 ft of elevation is definitely not easy peasy.
Yosemite Valley Loop Trail Bike Ride
After a rewarding hike it’s nice to just relax for a minute. While I loaded up the cooler and brought a bunch of food with me, it was super comforting to know Yosemite has loads of food options. It’s so peaceful to just snag a spot to rest for a bit and enjoy lunch with an awesome view.
Up next? A bike ride! The Yosemite Valley Loop is about 20 miles total, but even just doing part of it is a worthwhile adventure. The path weaves past Mirror Lake, El Capitan, the Meadow, Bridalveil Falls, and Yosemite Falls. It’s a bit of a choose your own adventure. Even better? There’s a free bike share program in Yosemite that allows use of bikes for 2 hours at a time. That was about all the physical activity I was keen on, after the morning hike, but The Yosemite Valley Lodge has bikes for rent as well if you’re looking to cruise around a bit longer ($30 Half Day/$40 Full Day).
photo via yosemite.org
Set Up Camp
If you’re down to camp, Upper Pines, Lower Pines, North Pines, and Camp 4 are all located in Yosemite Valley. For anyone planning a last minute trip in Yosemite’s busy summer season, Camp 4 might be your best chance at snagging a campsite as these are released one week out. The other three campgrounds open up campsite reservations 5 months in advance. North Pines is actually so sought after, there’s a lottery system in place as part of the booking process there! A friend recommended Camp 4 to me, and I loved it! It’s set up a bit different than typical national park campsites, but it lends itself to a fun, community environment.
Tunnel View
Finish the day out by taking in the sunset at Tunnel View. It’s hard not to feel like a photographer, with the sun painting El Capitan and Half Dome with rays of golden light. This spot is easily accessible, making it a popular choice for capturing postcard-worthy photos. Even if you don’t take a single picture, simply soaking in the magic of Yosemite’s dramatic landscapes is an unbeatable way to round out the day. The sweeping views from Tunnel View at sunset encapsulate both the grandeur and tranquility of Yosemite in an unforgettable scene.
DAY 2
Yosemite Valley Visitor Center
This is the largest visitor center in the park and the main hub for park information. It’s a must-stop for any park-goers looking to secure their park stamp! It also offers a buffet of resources like maps, exhibits, and interactive displays that cover the park’s history, geology, and wildlife.
I sometimes like to snag a couple postcards at the park visitor center to send to my sisters, and there’s a very conveniently located post office right around the corner. In general, there’s a lot in the area by the visitor center, so go to the bathroom, grab a snack, and get ready to go, because day two takes us out and away from the valley.
Glacier Point
Home to one of the most spectacular, panoramic views in the park, Glacier Point features sweeping vistas of Yosemite Valley, Half Dome, Yosemite Falls, and the High Sierra peaks. Sitting at over 7,200 feet, this viewpoint provides a breathtaking perspective of the valley and its renown, granite landmarks.
Depending on how much time you have or perhaps how your legs are feeling, you have two options for taking in the view. You can either take a short walk to a viewpoint or hike the Sentinel Dome and Taft Point Trail. The latter is about 5 miles round trip and a little over 1,000 feet of elevation. It makes for a nice, brisk start to the day. This is what I opted for (and loved it), but either way you’re going to have a beautiful morning.
Glacier Point is accessible by car for approximately late May through October or November, depending on conditions.
Mariposa Grove
Mariposa Grove is home to over 500 giant sequoias. These are one of the largest and oldest trees on Earth, with some towering over 200 feet tall and living for more than 2,000 years. These ancient giants, like the iconic Grizzly Giant, offer visitors a rare glimpse into the ancient natural world, making a walk through the grove a powerful, humbling experience. There’s a tranquility to the forest that is simply different from other regions of the park.
Getting to Mariposa Grove is a bit of an adventure. After arriving at the Mariposa Grove Welcome Plaza, everyone must take a shuttle to the grove. Once you arrive at the grove, there’s a few different hiking options, but we recommend the 2 mile Grizzly Giant Loop Trail. How many times in life do you have the opportunity to see a 3,000 year old tree??
photo via nps.gov
Mariposa Grove Shuttle Hours
6/25 – 9/2
8 am to 7 pm (last bus leaves Mariposa Grove at 8 pm). Buses pick up every 10 to 15 minutes
9/3 – 11/2
8 am to 5:30 pm (last bus leaves Mariposa Grove at 6:30 pm). Buses pick up about every 15 minutes
11/3 – 11/30
Weather permitting, 8 am to 3:30 pm (last bus leaves Mariposa Grove at 5:00 pm). Buses pick up about every 15 minutes
12/1 – 4/15 (at least)
No shuttle service available
When the shuttle service is not running, the only way to reach Mariposa Grove is via a 2 mile walk (each way) along the Washburn Trail or the Mariposa Grove Road.
Bunking Down
Where you choose to spend the night is rather dependent on where you are headed the next morning. I live in southern California so the Wawona campground was perfectly situated. That being said, if you are headed north, you might want to consider another campground or sleeping accommodation. If you decide to stay at the Wawona Campground, the Wawona Meadow is an awesome spot to stargaze!
photo via nps.gov
As a solo traveler, I felt 48 hours in Yosemite was the perfect amount to sample the park and experience the sights for myself. Exploring by myself, I’m always happy to have just gone out there and adventured, instead of always waiting to go with someone else. That being said, I’m already excited to head back in the future— hopefully to hike half dome with some friends! Life is a balance— happy travels!
A literal life saving queen, Kayla Grace is an Army nurse in southern California. She can be found patching patients up in the emergency department but is equally likely to be spotted out hiking or backpacking. She is also quite the coffee connoisseur, and she will go out of her way to find a local coffee shop when she visits somewhere new!
Badlands National Park in South Dakota is a unique and rugged landscape, known for its dramatic rock formations, deep canyons, and expansive prairies. The park is home to some of the most striking geological features in North America, with colorful layers of sedimentary rock that tell the story of millions of years of natural history. It’s also a haven for wildlife, including bison, bighorn sheep, and prairie dogs. Badlands is characterized by its otherworldly beauty and the sense of solitude that it offers. An adventurous half day in the Badlands is the pit-stop you can’t afford to miss!
If you’re driving through South Dakota, a half day in the Badlands National Park is ideal for experiencing the key highlights. The scenic Badlands Loop Road offers stunning viewpoints, allowing you to capture the essence of the park’s striking landscapes without feeling rushed. A few short hikes let you explore the rock formations up close. In just a few hours, you can see the park’s iconic formations, spot wildlife, and enjoy breathtaking views, making a half day the perfect introduction to the Badlands.
Fast Facts About Badlands National Park
Size: 244,000 acres
Visitors: 1,046,400 visitors annually (data from 2023)
Highest elevation: 3,340 feet at Red Shirt Table
Closest Airports: the Rapid City Regional Airport (RAP) is 70 miles away (~1.5 hour drive) or the Sioux Falls Regional Airport (FSD) is 240 miles (~4 hour drive)
National Park Initiation: November 10th, 1978 (established on the same day as Theodore Roosevelt, making them the 38th and 39th national parks)
Fun Fact: there are many native tribes associated with the park, but the Oglala Sioux Tribe’s Pine Ridge Indian Reservation is actually part of the southern region of the park
We recently moved from Wisconsin to Oregon. Instead of driving straight through, we decided to make a road trip out of it! We stopped at Custer State Park, Yellowstone, and the Tetons, but the views of South Dakota were the most unexpectedly breathtaking! Xavier kept us humble by staying incredibly stoic, despite all the excitement.
A Good Night’s Rest
Perhaps the most important part of maximizing your time on a busy day? Getting a good night’s sleep! There are certainly accommodations nearby when you are visiting Badlands, but what’s more convenient than staying in the park?? In-park accommodations tend to either be very economical (camping) or a little on the spendy side (lodge living). Either way you have great options to choose from. It’s worth noting, both camping and the lodge will fill up quickly. If you know this is where you want to stay, book sooner rather than later!
Cedar Pass RV and Campground
The Cedar Pass RV and Campground is located near the Ben Reifel Visitor Center. It has restroom and shower facilities as well as pretty easy access to all amenities of Cedar Pass Lodge. There’s 96 camp sites, and practically all of them have scenic views of the badlands formations.
Sage Creek Campground
The Sage Creek Campground is a bit more of a backcountry experience. This campground is located on Sage Creek Rim Road, with 22 sites. It’s free and first-come first-serve; however, it’s only accessible via an unpaved road that may temporarily close after winter storms and spring rains.
As an FYI, motor homes, pull behind trailers, and other recreational vehicles >18 ft are prohibited. Pit toilets and covered picnic tables are available, but not water. Potable water is available at the Ben Reifel Visitor Center.Generators are not permitted here.
Cedar Pass Lodge
The Cedar Pass Lodge is open for visitors to stay from April 19th– October 20th. You can bunk down in one-of-a-kind cabins with custom-made, regionally handcrafted lodgepole pine furniture. If you’re open to tasting the lodge’s take on native cuisine, the Cedar Pass Restaurant makes fresh fry bread daily for their Sioux Indian Tacos. Worth trying!!
It’s worth noting, if you happen to visit outside these months, you might want to pack some snacks (or lunch) for yourself as it’s a bit of a drive to get to the nearest grocery store or restaurant. The last thing anyone needs is to find themselves hungry and far away from food!
photo via www.cedarpasslodge.com
◁ An Action Packed Half Day ▷
Get ready for a little bit over everything in the Badlands! While the weather can get quite warm in the summer months, even in August, it can still feel cool in the mornings. It’s worth it to get up early to ensure you’re not hiking in the heat of the day. With its location not too far off the interstate, a half day is the perfect amount of time to see a vibrant sunrise, a couple adventurous hikes, a handful of memorable overlooks… and hopefully a bison spotting or two.
There are three entrances into the park. The Pinnacles and Northeast entrances are relatively easy to access off of I-90. If you find yourself making a cross-country road trip, like we did, this stop might not be much of a detour!
Big Badlands Overlook
The Big Badlands Overlook is right inside the Northeast entrance of the park. This makes it a perfect first place to pull over and pop out! Even if it wasn’t conveniently located, it would still be a must-see spot in Badlands National Park because it offers sweeping, panoramic views of the park’s dramatic landscape. From this vantage point, you can take in the colorful layers of eroded rock formations, deep canyons, and rugged cliffs that truly define the Badlands. The overlook provides an excellent introduction to the park’s unique geology and is especially stunning at sunrise, with the soft morning light enhancing the vibrant colors of the terrain. It’s a very accessible viewpoint— perfect for capturing the park’s vast beauty.
The Door Trail
The Door Trail is a unique hike. It starts along a boardwalk and becomes a bit more of a choose-your-own-adventure. Hikers can explore the natural terrain for a more immersive adventure, following numbered signs that lead to the end-of-trail viewpoint. This hiking experience offers visitors an up-close experience of the rugged landscape, while not being too overwhelming as the trail is only 1 mile round trip. Its mix of ease and rewarding views makes it a great option for visitors of all ages and abilities.
The Notch Trail
If you only do one hike in the Badlands, it should be The Notch Trail! Even though it’s only 1.5 miles in total, it features a unique blend of experiences: a steep wooden ladder climb, narrow pathways, and dramatic views of the surrounding Badlands formations. The trail leads you through canyons and cliffs, culminating in a spectacular overlook of the White River Valley. The Notch Trail’s obstacles and breathtaking views make it a bit more adventurous than you might initially presume, for those seeking a bit of thrill in a relatively short distance.
Don’t be fooled, by the ladder— it’s a much steeper climb than it appears to be!
White River Valley Overlook
The White River Valley Overlook stands out from other viewpoints because it offers expansive views of the park’s eroded cliffs and spires with the vast White River Valley stretching out in the distance. Unlike some other overlooks that focus on the more compact rock formations, this viewpoint gives visitors a true sense of the Badlands’ wide-open spaces and the interplay between the rugged badlands terrain and the surrounding grasslands. The contrast between the jagged formations and the rolling valley below makes it a particularly unique and serene spot.
We especially loved it because there’s a worn path that ventures out into the ridge spires. As always, proceed with caution, but it’s fun to have a bit more immersive feel!
Panorama Point
Panorama Point is special because it offers visitors a sweeping, 360-degree view of the park’s vast, layered landscape. It lives up to its panoramic name by providing a comprehensive view of the surrounding badlands, prairie, and distant horizons. This makes it an ideal spot to fully appreciate the park’s impressive terrain.
Pinnacles Overlook
Pinnacles Overlook offers one of the most expansive views in the park. From a towering vantage point, the rugged cliffs, eroded spires, and deep canyons Badlands are known for are showcased. Pinnacles Overlook is also a prime spot for wildlife sightings, including bison, bighorn sheep, and prairie dogs. This makes it a must-see stop for nature lovers and photographers alike!
A half day in the Badlands National Park was an unexpected delight as we made our way across the country. The technicolor spires and canyons really are something to behold! If you are looking for the closest neighboring national park, you don’t have to look very far. Wind Cave National Park is only 2 hours away… as is Custer State Park! We hope you have a lovely adventure— happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
Grand Teton National Park, located in Wyoming, is a breathtaking destination known for its towering peaks, pristine alpine lakes, and abundant wildlife. Dominated by the jagged Teton Range, the park offers visitors a stunning mix of rugged mountain landscapes, lush forests, and serene valleys. Outdoor enthusiasts can enjoy endless activities, from hiking and boating to wildlife spotting and photography, with the iconic Jackson Hole valley as a backdrop. Whether you’re seeking adventure or simply want to soak in the park’s natural beauty, the Tetons and all the top highlights are a must-visit for anyone exploring the American West.
The staggering Teton peaks are nothing short of awe-inspiring, and a full day in Grand Teton National Park provides the perfect amount of time to experience its most iconic highlights. If you really enjoy hiking, you could easily spend a few days here; however, a single day affords you the time to capture the essence of the Tetons without feeling rushed.
Fast Facts About GrAND TETON National Park
Size: 310,000 acres
Visitors: 3,417,106 visitors (data from 2023)
Closest Airport: Jackson Hole Airport — this is the only commercial airport located entirely within a National Park (in the US)
Became a National Park: in 1929 by an Act of Congress
Highest point: 13,770 feet at the peak of Grand Teton mountain
Fun Fact: the coldest temperature recorded in the park was a whopping -63°F! Brrrrrr!
We recently moved from Wisconsin to Oregon, and instead of driving straight through, we decided to make a road trip out of it! We stopped at the Badlands, Custer State Park, and Yellowstone, but the views of the Tetons might have just been the most astounding. Xavier kept us humble by sleeping through all of the breathtaking views.
‘Twas the Night Before
There are loads of accommodation options when you’re visiting the Tetons because Jackson is close enough that it makes for a convenient base camp. The only thing more convenient? Staying in the park! In-park accommodations tend to either be very economical (camping) or a little on the spendy side (lodge living). Either way you have lots of options to choose from— you can explore them all below. It’s worth noting, both camping and the lodges will fill up quickly. If you know this is where you want to stay, book sooner rather than later!
Get ready for an action packed day! The below order of stops is loosely organized around starting your day in Jackson; however, the stops can be re-organized however it makes sense for your diving plan! Get ready for a couple of gorgeous hikes, a handful of postcard-worthy viewpoints, and a dreamy relaxation spot to end the day!
Driving the loop as detailed below takes right around two hours total. This really flies by when you’re popping out for different stops along the way! You can see the stops from a bird’s eye view below.
Mormon Row
Mormon Row is a fantastic sunrise spot due to its iconic views of the Teton Range, with the historic barns of Mormon Row in the foreground. As the sun rises, it bathes the mountains in soft, golden light, creating a breathtaking contrast between the rugged peaks and the pastoral setting. The weathered barns are remnants of early Mormon settlers, and they add a unique and photogenic element to the scene. The calm morning air, wildlife activity, and serene atmosphere make sunrise at Mormon Row a magical experience. Just be aware, this is by no means an “underrated” sunrise spot…. you will be one of many photographers, so if you’re committed to the shot, you’ll want to arrive early!
Jenny Lake
Nestled at the base of the Teton Range, the crystal-clear waters of Jenny Lake reflect the towering peaks, creating picture-perfect views. This is arguably the most popular spot in the park, so even if you aren’t up to catch the sunrise, you should plan to head here first! The lake itself is serene and beautiful, but it also serves as a gateway to some of the park’s most-hiked trails: Hidden Falls and Inspiration Point. Its accessibility and breathtaking surroundings make it a must-visit spot in the Tetons.
Spending a full day in the Tetons means you have time for a couple hikes. While you can hike around Jenny Lake to get to the Inspiration Point and Hidden Falls trailhead, the boat ride there is rather scenic. It’s also helpful for the economy of time on an action-packed day. Clocking in around 2 miles, this is a perfect way to start the day, without feeling too overwhelming. Hidden Falls is certainly worth stopping at, but the views from Inspiration Point are the crown jewel of this boating and hiking extravaganza.
view of Jenny Lake at Inspiration Point
Hidden Falls
Boats depart every 10-15 minutes, running continuously throughout the day. They don’t take reservations, you simply pay upon arrival and hop on the boat. Pricing can be found here.
baby’s first boat ride!
Be Bear Aware: If you already own bear spray don’t forget to pack it, and if you don’t own some, STRONGLY consider either renting or purchasing some. Bear sightings are not uncommon in Grand Teton National Park— especially when out hiking. The hikes included in this itinerary are well trafficked enough by other people, but it’s always better to be safe than sorry!
bear spray at the ready, even at Inspiration Point!
Taggart Lake
Now, the Inspiration Point trail is a really beautiful and amazing experience, but you end up with an awesome view of the lake… you don’t really have a view of the Tetons. For that reason, we feel you need to do at least one other hike to fully take in the Tetons.
We LOVED the Taggart Lake hike! Since we’d already trekked a bit at Jenny Lake, the sub-500 feet of elevation and just-over-3.5 mile length was welcome. Plus the views of the lake were absolutely gorgeous— pictures don’t quite do it justice. This is the kind of spot where you wouldn’t be sad to pack a snack and a sparkling water, and just hang out for a bit, taking it in before you head back! We felt this was a perfect compliment to the Inspiration Point hike– different enough that you get two unique hiking experiences in the park.
To save a little time/distance, you could treat this trail as an out and back instead of a loop… it might shave off half a mile or so. If you have a bit extra time, you can keep stepping to Bradley Lake and hit both! As an alternate option, the trailhead for Delta Lake isn’t far; however, this trail, while beautiful, might be a bit much (~8 miles + >2,ooo ft elevation) for a one-day itinerary.
beautiful teton views on the trail to Taggart Lake
Schwabacher Landing
Schwabacher Landing provides the most picturesque views of the Teton Range, reflected in the calm waters of the Snake River. This requires a short walk from the parking lot, making it fun to stop at different points along the path, to find your perfect shot.
Snake River Overlook
This overlook provides panoramic views of the Snake River winding through the valley with the Teton Range as a majestic backdrop, perfect for scenic photos and iconic landscapes. The juxtaposition of the river against the mountains makes this a must-stop!
Colter Bay Lakeshore
Located along Jackson Lake, Colter Bay offers serene views of the Tetons. There’s no bad viewpoints in the Tetons, but I think this one just might be the best. There’s also recreational opportunities like boating and kayaking, and easy access to nature trails, making it as picturesque as it is family friendly.
While the fun activities might not make the agenda with only one day in the park, it’s worth grabbing a beer at Leek’s Marina & Pizzeria. While the views here are truly incredible, the pizza….. was not. Perhaps we came on an off day, but alas, can’t say we recommend the pizza– the beer was good though!
A bit farther south, the Trapper Grill sits on Lake Jackson. We didn’t stop here, but the menu seems solid, and the views look sublime! Even if you don’t grab lunch or dinner at the Trapper Grill, the Signal Mountain Lodge General Store is right next door, which makes for a convenient spot to grab some lakeshore relaxation snacks.
String Lake & Leigh Lake
To round out the loop around the park, head back down to String Lake and Leigh Lake. This area is a bit of an underrated gem, and it’s the perfect place to wind down. This is by no means a secret spot, but we were so enchanted with how cozy this area was. There are loads of little alcove ‘nooks’ along the lake, with a bench and small sandy beach area. There’s also a scenic walking path between String Lake and Leigh Lake if you are looking for one final stroll to end the day.
taking a little dip— beware the water is COLD!
scenic path/trail between String Lank and Leigh Lake
Grand Teton National Park is amazing because you can appreciate the staggering beauty of the park by just driving through it. The more you have time to explore the more immersive the experience becomes, but you truly can spend a full day in the park and leave feeling satisfied with the sights, sounds, and experiences. This is a park we are already excited to come back to!
While we just have the one little peanut, our friends over at Plan More Adventures tackled a Yellowstone and Tetons trip with three kiddos. You can check it out here. We hope you have a lovely adventure— happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
New York City is an epicenter of commerce, diversity, tourism, and culture. While two days isn’t nearly enough time to enjoy the big apple in full, sometimes you’ve got to make the best of the time you have! When you only have time for a forty eight hour trip, it’s a given the schedule will be action-packed.
Whether you’re in town for a bachelorette party, solo exploration, a concert, or a couples adventure, there’s so much to see! The vibe of this itinerary is very much a never-been-to-NYC-before-trying-to-see-as-much-as-I-can, as we attempt to tackle all of the must-see highlights.
In the last six months I took a solo trip by myself and then again just recently visited to celebrate McKenna’s 21st birthday. I had an amazing time both visits… NYC can definitely get touristy but in the best way! Below I have includes an action packed two-day itinerary, hitting all the classic, must-see spots in New York City— with a walking map included!
I’m not always a big museum person but the Museum of Natural History is certainly an exception. There’s an abundance of unique exhibitions that could truly keep you entertained all day. I was here a couple hours and only made it through the two dinosaur halls and the African mammals exhibit. I’m already eager to go back and explore the Hall of North American Forests!
Back to back museums? Not quite! The MET is a cornucopia of rich culture; however, because of time constraints, I was just keen to see it from the outside. Having watched Gossip Girl, I rather wanted to get a picture on the step. Not only is the building grandiose, but the area around the MET was rather lovely as well. A worthy pit stop, at the very least. If you are a connoisseur of art, this stop may warrant a more thorough review!
A walk in the park anyone? Not only is the park a refreshing contrast to the ambiance of the city but it makes for some fun sightseeing: yoga, picnics, and performers, but also some lovely foliage in the fall months. Whether you’re wandering around or giving your legs a little rest at one of the many benches, the park is worth stopping by– especially since it’s easy to wander through as you’re walking around.
While it might not be a main stop for most, we loved watching the Eloise at the Plaza movie growing up, so if you’re similarly inclined to have your own ~main character~ moment, the Plaza is right along the walking itinerary for the day and super easy to swing by.
Perhaps a more seasonal stop, but if you happen to be in New York around the holidays, the Rockefeller Center would be worth wandering through, just to see the oversized tree! Not necessarily worth stopping by any ‘ole day of the year, but absolutely magical around Christmas!
The intersection of consumerism, tourism, and entertainment glows at this epicenter of New York culture. Whether you’re keen to catch a broadway show or simply enchanted by the groundbreaking graphics, Times Square is about as NYC as it gets. Touristy? Yes, but you have to go at least once just to see it!
Just an FYI: there’s so much in the big city that might catch you by surprise. I was startled to learn a ‘Naked Cowgirl’ (a granny with nipple covers) is a regular fixture there. Don’t say I didn’t warn you!
Central Park isn’t the only charming park to rest your weary legs at! I snagged some freshly sliced mango from a street vendor (much better than the hot dog), and took a little break. The multitude of benches makes it easy to sit down, enjoy a snack, and relax for a moment. A fun fact: if you happen to visit in the winter months, the lawn at Bryant Park is transformed into NYC’s only free admission ice skating rink!
One Big Macy’s
Macy’s Herald Square store is the largest department store in the United States with 1.25 million square feet of retail space. It takes up an entire city block!! The flagship store blows the hometown Macy’s out of the water! I didn’t exactly have time to shop ‘til I dropped, but it was fun just wandering through such a seemingly endless store. A perfect shopping break if you find yourself early for you Empire State Building reservation.
Timing is everything for this outstanding stop, and making a reservation in advance is a must! I went at sunset, and loved seeing the sun set over the city. As a bonus, you can stay up there for a bit and watch as the sky turns dark and the lights of the skyline come to life. It costs a little extra to go all the way up to the 102nd floor observatory, but it’s worth every penny. At the 86th floor, the observation area is inside, but up on the 102nd the observation deck is outside. This alone makes the view so much more engaging!
If you’re hoping to make it up to the top by a certain time— perhaps sunset— make your reservation, 20-30 minutes earlier than you want to be up there. They will not let you in early, and it takes some time to work your way through the line to the elevators and get through security. Don’t let anything stand in the way of your perfect sunset view!
If you were to only do one touristy activity in New York City, this should be it—personally, it was my favorite part of the weekend!
Day One Road Map
Dust off your walking boots because it’s a full day! While 3.8 miles seems like it’s a ton of walking, remember it’s broken up into segments as you explore all the various stops along the way. Plus part the longest stretch of walking is either alongside or through Central Park, so at the very least, it would be a scenic walk!
Grand Central Station is a rather eye-catching transportation hub! This cathedral-esque terminal is a temple to the everyday commuter as it has become so much more than a subway stop. Grand Central maintains various shops and over 30 different dining options– in addition to a rotating events schedule as well. Don’t miss the zodiac ceiling, information booth clock, or whispering gallery. I took the subway out of Grand Central to Battery Park, so a stop by this historic mainstay of New York City transit was built right in!
This personification of American freedom and democracy stands as tall and proud today as it has every day for over 130 years. Whether you are intrigued by history, have ancestors that immigrated through Ellis Island, or just want to see an iconic statue in person, the Statue of Liberty awaits your arrival. Statue City Cruises is the only ferry company that operates tours out to Liberty Island and Ellis Island, in conjunction with the National Park Service. All reservations need to be made in advance online.
The Statue of Liberty and Ellis Island are incredibly sentimental landmarks to the roots of American immigration culture. As such, prior to boarding the boat, you must go through security to ensure the safety of other riders as well as the monuments themselves. The ferries leave as scheduled, so be sure to allot time for the security line!
I don’t consider myself a huge history buff, but between the two islands, I spent a few hours wandering, reading, and trying to absorb everything there was to see. On a quick weekend trip time is extra valuable, but I truly enjoyed making the most of this stop. Even as I left, I felt it was somewhere I’d want to return to again in the future.
Pro tip: Do the 9am tour! It’s the first tour of the day, so you beat the rush. It’s a bit more relaxing with less people around–plus it makes for better pictures! Speaking of pictures, as you are going out to the islands, don’t forget to turn around and appreciate the NYC skyline.
In the United States, September 11th has name recognition unmatched by almost any other day in the calendar year. While it’s a day of somber remembrance, I was too young at the time it occurred to really remember all the emotions and trauma. It was all too easy to spend a couple hours in the museum reading, listening, and contemplating on this pivotal day in American history. I found the 9/11 Museum to be a beautiful and meaningful tribute to the victims and heroes that died that day. A worthwhile stop!
Money in Your Pocket
New York can be expensive– especially when you’re trying to make the most of your time. Here’s a couple ways to save over a quick weekend adventure.
Public Transportation
Instead of paying for taxis or ubers, used public transportation! I flew into La Guardia, and took the LaGuardia Link (a free bus) to the subway station. Once I was in the subway station, I used the CityMapper app to help me navigate more efficiently. I took the Q70 and found it to be safe and fairly easy to navigate. A taxi from the airport to Times Square or Central Park will cost about $50, whereas a metro card will cost you around $3. Plus what’s more New York than taking the Subway?
New York Pass
I knew I would be trying to cram as much sightseeing into my two days as possible, so I bought the New York Pass. The cost of a two-day pass varies according to whatever promotions they’re running– I snagged mine for $160. It granted me admission into the American Museum of Natural History, Empire State Building, Statue of Liberty and Ellis Island, as well as the 9/11 Memorial and Museum. If you know you want to check out museums and more touristy haunches, it could certainly be worth the monies.
If you’re more keen to walk around Central Park and go shopping on 5th Avenue, it would be a waste. When we went with friends for McKenna’s birthday, we had a less action-packed sight-seeing itinerary, so we didn’t make any New York Pass purchases. It’s all about the vibe of what you want to fit into your two days!
Hotwire
Use Hotwire to save a little on your stay! I ended up at the Renwick Hotel, and loved how centrally located it was. The room ended up costing around $235, which was super reasonable for being close to both Central Park and Times Square. They have luggage storage if you arrive before your room is ready and don’t care to lug your bags around the city with you. Also worth mentioning, I was a female solo traveler, and I felt super safe at this hotel.
written by Dana
CEO of being stubbornly independent, Dana lives to speak her mind as her feisty personality lends itself to her outspoken nature. Dana epitomizes the concept of “spending money on experiences, not things” as she is constantly complaining that she has nothing to wear, but ALWAYS has her next trip on the docket. Dana recently graduated from FSU, and has joining us big kids in the adult workforce. She works with our dad at Wherry Truck Lines, keeping all the good ‘ole boys in line.
Mount Rainier towers above the skyline at 14,411 ft elevation and is a snow-capped, breath-taking vision of nature year-round. Outdoor enthusiasts of all ages and fitness levels travel to come experience the trails and the accompanying views. The transcendent peak is visible in the distance from over 100 miles away, and is a beautiful reminder of the vast topography within the park. The different regions of the park offer unique viewpoints of Mt Rainier. When you’re exploring someplace new, you want to be sure to make the most of your time. We’ve outlined the six best day hikes in Mount Rainier… the hardest part will be choosing which one to do first!
Whether you’re new to outdoor adventures or a seasoned wilderness explorer, there’s abounding beauty for everyone to savor. The views make hikes of any length fly by and steep elevations feel worth it. Grab your trekking poles and pack your bags!
Five Mt. Rainier Park Regions
It comes as no surprise that the landscape varies in different regions of the park. With over 250 miles of trails, there’s enough forests, rivers, lakes, and streams to stay enchanted for weeks. Before you get hiking, it helps to get your bearings. Due to the sheer size of the park, trails are sorted into five different areas.
The mountain for which the park is named stands tall and impermeable in the center. There’s no way to drive through the center of the park, but there are ample trails to explore its surroundings.
Our Six Favorite Hikes
1. Mount Fremont Lookout Trail
The Sunrise area of the park showcases the impressive rocky terrain on the northeastern side of Mount Rainier. The Mt. Fremont hike was one of the first hikes we took in the park as continues to be a favorite, with its 360 degree views from the old fire tower lookout. While it wasn’t easy, we didn’t find it to be too overbearingly challenging at 6 miles with a little over 1,000 feet of elevation, and we felt we were rewarded in spades with both the magnitude of Mt. Rainier as well as the seemingly endless stretch of green valleys to the north. It boasts one of the best Rainier summit views in the park!
2. Burroughs Mountain Trail
The Burroughs Mountain Trail also stems from the Sunrise Visitor Center and stretches 9 miles, tackling nearly 2,500 feet of elevation to climb the three Burroughs. Even if you don’t go the whole stretch you will be privy to beautiful views throughout, with the second Burroughs mountain, showcasing spectacular views of Mount Rainier as well as the Emmons Glacier. While wildlife spottings are never guaranteed, we’ve seen goats, marmot, and deer somewhat regularly. Last time we were in the park we even saw a bear. Definitely a trail for a hardier hiker, but so worth it!
3. Silver Falls Trail
A bit easier on the knees, the Silver Falls Trail in the Ohanapecosh region of the park is a very palatable 3 miles round trip. Compared to many other trails in the park, it’s relatively level, with about 500 feet of elevation gained in total throughout the hike. This makes it a more popular hike for families and hikers of all ages. The trail follows the Ohanapecosh River, and makes for quite the sight as the icy glacier water tumbles through Silver Falls. Another fun bonus, this is a loop trail (as opposed to going out and back along the same trail), so you will get to enjoy different forestry scenery on your way back.
photo via www.nps.gov
4. Skyline Trail
The Skyline Trail Loop is in the, very aptly named, Paradise area of the park. This little slice of heaven is the most popular among visitors and for good reason. The colorful meadows and running streams are just as idyllic as they sound, and it’s equally beautiful as the warm hues of fall foliage roll in. As this trail is a loop, you have two options for your climb. If you tackle the trail clockwise, you will have a steeper but shorter journey up to the Panorama Point. If you’re keen on a more graded climb, you’ll want to tackle this trail counterclockwise. Regardless of how you get there, both the journey and the destination are worthwhile.
5. Mildred Point Trail
Making your way into the Longmire region of the park, set your sights on the Mildred Point via Comet Falls trail. This trail stretches almost 8 miles and climbs over 2,500 feet of elevation. Don’t let that intimidate you though! This hike is a true two-for-one special. About a mile and a half in, you’ll get to enjoy the enchanting waterfall at Comet Falls, followed by some heart-pumping switchbacks and a log bridge that will lead you to Mildred Point.
From your perch at the top of a meadow, you will have an unfettered view of the ever-lovely Mt. Rainier. You really can’t beat the diverse landscape of this hike with its rushing waterfalls, flowing rivers, charming bridges, and endless meadows… all with Mount Rainier as a stunning backdrop.
photo via www.nps.gov
6. Tolmie Peak Trail
Gotta save the best for last! At the end of a 15 mile-long dirt road you’ll find the beginning of the Tolmie Peak Trail, right alongside Mowich Lake. This hike exudes etherial beauty with its sweeping views of Eunice Lake, rolling alpine peaks, and a snow-covered Rainier. The cherry on top? Tolmie Peak houses another fire-tower lookout, which guarantees a panoramic view. This hike covers about 5.5 miles and over 1,500 feet of elevation, making it moderately difficult, but certainly doable!
But Wait, There’s More
The National Park Service Website has a complete list of trails, up-to-date trail conditions, and information regarding the various campgrounds. As an outdoor enthusiast, I generally love being outdoors, but I’m rather partial to a hike that ends in a gorgeous view. My favorite aspect of the AllTrails website is that you can see pictures other hikers have taken, to better grasp the hard-earned view you’re hiking out for.
As a note: whatever trail you choose, be sure to stay on the trail— no creating new short-cuts! Even though it seems small, if everyone trampled the meadows a little, the collective damage would be massive.
Packing your Day Pack
Can’t crush your hike without your day pack! There’s nothing like being stoked for an awesome day hike, only to realize half-way in that you don’t need half of what you’re carrying. Even worse is when you realize you forgot something crucial! Due to the snowfall Mount Rainier National Park receives every year, this list would be more extensive for winter months. We have you covered for all your late spring, summer, and early fall hikes.
Jacket— this is top of the list for a reason… mostly because it will be unnecessary for a majority of your hike. That being said, chances are, if you plan to spend any extended period of time at the peak, you will likely be glad to have it. Additionally, if there’s any chance of rain, it’s also not a bad idea to bring a rain jacket along with you as well. The weather can change quickly. Rain jackets aren’t heavy and they’re well worth it when the heavens open!
Camera — whether it’s a DSLR or an iPhone, the view is definitely something you’ll be glad to look back on later!
Trail map — you can either download a trail map from the NPS website or grab one from the trailhead, but it’s always a good idea to have a map with you. The trails are well-kept and the signage clearly dictates which paths to follow for desired destinations. That being said, we are big ‘safety first, safety always’ gals, so it’s always a good idea to have a map, just in case you get lost!
example of the trail map for the sunrise area trails
Snacks — our go-to hiking snacks are dried mango, fresh fruits (in mason jars so they don’t get smushed) & veggies. Who doesn’t love a couple handfuls of homemade trail mix?? There’s nothing like reaching the viewpoint and sitting down to take it all in, with a tasty treat.
Water — for an approximately 6 mile hike, we usually take 20-40 oz of water per person, depending on the day. This is not including the water bottles we keep in the car to drink from before and after the hike. We always like to ensure we have more than enough water to stay hydrated, without carrying around extra weight.
Sunglasses — while sunnies are always a good idea for hiking, Mount Rainier has snow year-round, and snow tends to reflect the sunlight, sometimes making it feel even brighter out.
Sunscreen — as you climb in elevation, the breeze can keep you cool and make you forget the sun is still beating down on you. Even if you sunscreen up before you depart, you may want to re-apply!
Headlamp — not necessary for shorter most daytime hike, but if you plan in hiking around sunrise or sunset, you’ll be glad to have a headlamp. While cellphones have flashlights that might suffice in a pinch, it’s safer and easier to hike with your light hands-free.
Chapstick — while this won’t necessarily make or break your hike, chances are you’ll be glad you have it. A chapstick with SPF is a bonus.
The 411 on Furry Friends
Generally speaking, Mt. Rainier is a no dogs allowed park. The exception? The Pacific Crest Trail stretches along the west coast of the country and cuts through the park. As such, this is a technical caveat since dogs are allowed on the Pacific Crest Trail throughout its entirety. That being said, all other trails (including the ones above) and campgrounds do not permit any non-service animal pets.
The best time of year to visit? Later than you might think. It all depends on the longevity of winter… or rather how cold the spring season is! We’ve gone hiking fourth of July weekend, and had to change plans on the fly due to snowy trails. Mid-to late summer and all throughout fall would be the best time to make an appearance.
written by Kayla
A literal life saving queen, Kayla Grace is an Army nurse in Tacoma, Washington. When she’s not fixing up tiny humans on the peds floor, she is likely to be found running, walking, or hiking outside— or crushing a home improvement project, as she has recently purchased her first home! Since moving to Washington, Kayla has maintained a plant-based diet— a feat largely unattainable by any other sister, but she makes it look *almost* possible with her I-can’t-believe-these-are-vegan chocolate chip cookies.
The Kenai Fjords National Park maintains a unique topography with its frigid water and flourishing forest, interwoven around millennia old ice and snow. The crown jewel of the park is the Harding Icefield, with over 30 glaciers stemming from this remnant ice sheet. These historic glaciers carved out fjords, leaving behind the deep, narrow inlets the park is named for. Here the ice age lingers at the intersection of cautious exploration and intentional preservation. With such diversity, there are many ways to gain an appreciation for the pristine, immense wilderness, so we detailed everything you need to know about the Kenai Fjords, to help make the most of your time.
Alaska is home to eight national parks, and the Kenai Fjords is arguably the most accessible park in the state, only two and a half hours away from Anchorage— Alaska’s largest city. Not only does the park itself have a worthy draw, but the Kenai Fjords are the beloved backyard of Seward, a popular fishing town on the Kenai Peninsula. Between the two, this pocket of Alaska is a must-visit for anyone keen to experience the beauty of pristine, immense wilderness!
Fast Facts About the kenai fjords National Park
Size: 607,805 acres
Visitors: 411,782 visitors (data from 2021)
Distance from Anchorage: 130 miles — 2.5 hour drive
Became a National Park: December 2nd, 1980
Most unique feature: the Harding Icefield — over 30 glaciers stem from this icefield!
While park stretches into a vast expanse, we did our best to explore as thoroughly as possible. From float planes to kayaks to good ole fashion boots, we set out to see everything there was to see. Below we have detailed your hike options, all of the various tours available in the area, and ways to ensure you catch a glimpse of the unique wildlife — as well as all the tips and tricks to ensure you have the best time.
Up, Up, and Away
Nothing like catching a bird’s eye view! Due to the expansive nature of the park as well as the hardiness of the topography, a plane tour can be a fantastic way to experience the lay of the land, from a bird’s eye view. We were headed to the Seward area via Moose’s Pass, so we stopped by Scenic Mountain Air for a float plane tour. The hour-long jaunt explored the south-central Kenai Peninsula. From our vantage point, we were able to see the Harding Icefield, Chugach Mountains, endless lakes and waterfalls, as well as a handful of wildlife sightings. My favorite spot to see was Bear Glacier Lagoon and the many icebergs it houses.
If you’re looking for a flightseeing option a bit closer to Seward, Seward Air Tours is a small plane experience with eight different tour options to choose from. If you’re keen to chopper through the skies, Seward Helicopter Tours offers not only a flight tour but they also have an option to go dog sledding over a glacier. While we didn’t do this in the park, we did something similar near Girdwood at Punchbowl Glacier and can attest that it is so beyond cool.
These Boots Were Made for Hiking
Having already appreciated the park from above during our float plane tour, we were excited to explore with our boots on the ground. The hiking options in the park are limited to the Exit Glacier Overlook Trail and the Harding Icefield Trail. Basically you get to choose between very easy or very challenging.
Trekking out to the Harding Icefield is a 9.2 mile out and back trail that tackles over 3,600 feet of elevation. During the summer months there can be ice and snow on the trail, so be sure to wear appropriate footwear. Even in later summer or early fall months, consider bringing spikes if you plan to walk on the icefield once you arrive. This rugged trail is prime real estate for all kinds of wildlife sightings, so be sure to keep your eyes peeled!
If you arrive at the park around 10am or 2pm, park rangers lead walking “tours” along the Exit Glacier Overlook trail. While the 2.2 miles of trail doesn’t take that long to hike, they provide additional commentary and insight regarding the park, evolution of the glacier, and local preservation. No advanced registration is needed, and there’s no cost associated with the walking educational opportunity.
For travelers that live by their own set of rules, the trail is easily navigated independently and the views are just as spectacular! As you walk out to the glacier overlook viewpoint, you will notice low-profile makers with years on them. These denote where the glacier extended to at various points throughout history. It’s one thing to hear how our glaciers are melting but another to see the receding line for yourself. Regardless of whether you go with a group or explore solo, the Exit Glacier is humbling to experience.
Whatever Floats Your Boat
Exploration by land, by air, and next up: by sea! We went adventuring with Major Marine Tours and loved it. Their Kenai Fjords Wildlife tours run for four hours, six hours, seven and a half hours, or eight and a half hours. We opted for a four hour tour (mainly because we were going as a family and our dad doesn’t always fare well on boats). While the longer tours will dive deeper into the park, we felt four hours was a perfect amount of time to see glaciers, fjords, and an outstanding breadth of wildlife. Our favorites were the puffins, humpback whales, seals, and mischievous otters. It was so thrilling to see these guys out in the wild.
What to expect? Upon entry on the boat, each group was assigned to a “home base” table, to store their things at and use as they pleased. In addition to the tables, there was ample space inside the boat as well as on the decks for people to observe as they pleased. And observe we did!! The captain was fabulous and any time we were near any sort of wildlife that may be of interest, he would linger (at an appropriate distance) to ensure everyone had an opportunity to see. They had snacks and drinks available for purchase, but you can also bring your own food and drink on board with you as well.
Paddle Powered
For a more immersive boating experience, hop in a kayak! If you’re not a big kayaker, it can certainly feel intimidating to be out in such a tiny boat; however, it is immensely serene to feel so small in the magnitude of nature’s magnitude. The interaction with nature is so much more intimate, with curious harbor seals popping their heads up a couple feet from your kayak– checking out what you’re up to.
We embarked on this adventure through Miller’s Landing, and wholeheartedly recommend them! Full disclosure, we suited up for a dusk kayaking trip to Bridal Veil Waterfall, so technically we stayed within the confines of Resurrection Bay and didn’t quite make it into the national park waters; however, this was more than enough adventure for us. They do offer all kinds of full day kayaking trips for more committed paddlers. Regardless of your paddling destination, it is humbling to experience the fjord environment and wildlife in this way.
The 30-Second Scoop on Seward
The Kenai Fjords National Park Visitor Center is actually located in the heart of Seward, making it very centrally located; however, not where you might expect to find it. Be sure to stop in and chat with a park ranger, stamp your national park passport, and collect any park mementos. While it’s not the true visitor center, the Exit Glacier Nature Center is a visitor center-like building near the trails in the park, so it’s not completely wilderness out there!
If you’re feeling a bit peckish, you have loads of restaurants to choose from. The Lone Chicharron Taqueria is going to have some fantastic tacos, while Gold Rush Bistro boasts an impressive bowl of clam chowder. Sweet Darlings has chocolates and gelato that are guaranteed to satisfy your sweet tooth. If you’re looking to crack open a cold one, Seward Brewing Company is an awesome local craft brewery.
Sampling different restaurants was easy because Seward is pretty compact. The main populus of the city stretches about a mile and a half long and is rather walkable. However, if you struggle with mobility impairments, Seward has a free shuttle to aid in transportation (and exploration!).
A majority of Alaska’s national parks are reachable only by bush plane and/or boat. Not only are the Kenai Fjords a breathtaking reflection of the wilderness Alaska is hailed for, but the accessibility of this park only adds to its charm. Any additional plane or boat trips taken once you arrive only add to the fullness of the experience.
If you’re eager to encounter more of Alaska’s astounding natural beauty, Denali National Park and Preserve is less than five hours outside of Anchorage, and boasts grandiose heights as the highest peak in North America. You won’t regret adding this mammoth park to your Alaskan bucket list. Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Explore the boundary waters up at Voyageurs— Minnesota’s only national park! With over 218,000 acres, there are endless nooks and crannies in this forested wetland. The network of rivers, streams, and lakes account for approximately 40% of Voyageurs National Park, however, much of the remaining land is accessible only by water. The interconnected waterways create a mosaic for eager visitors to explore. Whether you’re keen for a day out on the water or intrigued by the Northern lights, here’s to making the most of your time at Voyageurs.
This is a perfect spot for a relaxing long weekend adventure, enjoying nature. From our favorite campsite to maximizing your chances of seeing the aurora borealis, we’ve got the scoop on this aquatic maze.
Enough Visitor Centers to Go Around
First stop? The visitor center! Voyageurs actually maintains three different visitor centers in distinct regions of the park. Rainy Lake is the farthest north and is the only visitor center open year-round. Kabetogama Lake and Ash River are both open seasonally, from May through September. Each center has its own boat launch, so the assorted locations help visitors access the various areas of the park with ease. Regardless which one you visit, be sure to get your national park passport stamped!
Whatever Floats Your Boat
Much of Voyageurs is either water or land only accessible by water. This means a boat is pretty essential to getting the full Voyageurs experience. From kayaks and canoes to pontoons and wakeboarding boats, you’ll see a variety of fun being had. We did a bit of a road trip adventure up to Voyageurs, and didn’t want to deal with a trailer when we were exploring some of the more touristy cities, so we just strapped a canoe to the roof of the car!
Perhaps you’d rather not deal with the hassle of bringing your boat along or maybe you’re keen to have someone else drive the boat– regardless, you have some options. If you’re interested in learning some fun facts while you float, the national park service offers a few different tours to help everyone explore. Otherwise, a comprehensive list of local guides and rentals can be found here.
Hiking
While Voyageurs isn’t hailed as a hiking destination, there’s a couple of hikes worth exploring. If you’re up near Rainy Lake, the Oberholtzer Trail is an easy, under two mile hike that will allow you to experience nature from a different perspective. Closer to the Ash River Visitor Center, you can wander through three miles of aquatic ecosystem views on the Blind Ash Bay Trail. These hiking trails are a great way to enjoy a bit of solitude as well as some potential birdwatching if you’re lucky! No doggos allowed on the trail though, so you’ll have to rock this walk by yourself or with some human pals.
Unique Sights
Each pocket of the park has its own little adventure that awaits. Just north of the Rainy Lake Visitor Center, you’ll find Little American Island. You can take a self-guided tour and see mentos of an old mining era. About five miles north of the Kabetogama Lake Visitor Center and only accessible by water, you will find the Ellsworth Rock Gardens. Originally created by Jack Ellsworth, the garden is a collection of unique rock sculptures and formations, surrounded by thousands of colorful blossoms.
Most easily accessible by the Ash River Visitor Center, Kettle Falls is just a hop, skip, and a jump from the Canadian border. This part of the park is home to a historic hotel. Their motto is “Tough place to get to….. But well worth it once you get there!”
Camping
Voyageurs is pretty unique in that all campsites are accessible exclusively by watercraft. You can make your camping reservation online, which is not only convenient but also a fab way to scope out all the various sites. Voyageurs doesn’t have a campground so much as it has loads of unique individual campsites. We stayed at Sphunge Island West, which is a little over a mile and a half from Kabetogama Lake Visitor Center.
If you don’t have a motorized boat and plan on canoeing, this is a perfect site as it’s a very reasonable distance to traverse with all of your camping stuff on board. There was only one other campsite on the island, and with no overland path to reach them, you really do feel like you have a little lake island to yourself. Most importantly, our campsite’s beach faced north, so we had a perfect view of the northern lights in the evening. Not all campsites are so ideally located, so be sure to investigate your campsite thoroughly before making any final decisions. As a bonus, pets were permitted at this campsite, so we were able to bring our dog!
As a note: While canoe voyages greater than 1.5 miles are beyond feasible, it’s worth noting, there are other motorized boats out tubing and zooming around. When we were in the ‘open bay area’ if you will, it made me grateful we picked something as close as we did. It would have been doable, but I would have been a bit nervous to embark on a much longer canoe trip, with all our backpacks and camping stuff in the boat.
Northern Lights
Voyageurs is certainly home to serene, natural beauty; however, if you have spent any amount of time adventuring around on lakes before, you might be looking for the extra-special-something to make this experience unique. While it’s impossible to guarantee, visiting Voyageurs when there’s a high likelihood of the aurora borealis making an appearance will take your usual lake-life experience to an ethereal level.
The University of Alaska in Fairbanks has an aurora forecast website that monitors geomagnetic activity to provide predictions of when the northern lights are most likely to make their appearance. We found this to be rather beneficial as we were planning our trip. When we arrived, we stopped at the visitor center and spoke with the park ranger, and she recommended the My Aurora Forecast app as a way to more closely monitor your likelihood of seeing the lights, in real time. It gives you a pretty accurate prediction for when you might get some magical dancing light action.
For us, watching the Northern lights dance across the sky was the ultimate highlight of the trip. While the lights tend to be more common to see in the winter months, we visited in early September and were treated to a wondrous light show. Happy travels and best of luck chasing down the magical aurora borealis!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Denali National Park and Preserve is home to not only the highest peak in North America but abundant wildlife as well. If you visit in the summer, the nearly endless daylight provides ample opportunity to maximize your exploration time. When you’re heading to a park as massive as Denali, it can be daunting to plan your trip. Whether you’re staying for a day or a week, we’ve compiled a list of unique adventures to have, to make the most of your time in Denali National Park.
While the national park system certainly caters to the outdoorsy, adventurers of any tenacity can enjoy the beauty of the park. From breath-taking hikes to picturesque plane rides and all the sled dogs in between, you won’t regret visiting this humbling reflection of nature’s boundless might.
Fast Facts About Denali National Park
Size: 6.1 million acres
Visitors: 427,562 (data from 2022)
Distance from Anchorage: 240 miles — 4 hour drive
Became a National Park: February 26th, 1917
Most unique feature: Mount Denali reaches up 20,310 ft, making it the highest peak in North America!
As with any national park, nature’s beauty shows off in a surreal way. Below we have detailed eight unique activities to allow you a robust Denali experience. Denali National Park is a perfect embodiment of the stark, Final Frontier allure Alaska is known for. Here’s to happy adventures!
1. Hike Horseshoe Lake Trail
Depending on where you’re departing from, getting to Denali can be a way. If you’ve spent a couple hours in the car, and are looking for a nice hike to stretch your legs out, the Horseshoe Lake Trail is a perfect option. It’s an awesome hike for everyone in the family to get out and enjoy nature.
Two miles goes by quickly, with all of the sweeping views. On this particular hike, we crossed paths with another group that saw three moose traipsing through. While we missed seeing them on our Hourseshoe jaunt, we ended up seeing at least one moose every day we were in the park and the surrounding Healy area!
2. Conquer the Mount Healy Overlook
The Mount Healy Overlook Trail is a perfect hike to start the day with– the early bird gets the worm, and the early risers get an empty trail! We were after it by 7am, and didn’t see anyone else out on the trail until we were heading back down the mountain! The 7 miles and over 2,700 feet of elevation was an energizing kick in the pants. Once we made it to the top, it was hard to want to head back. Looking out at the horizon was as beautiful as it was peaceful.
While any hiker could certainly crush this route, the elevation and length kept some of the less outdoorsy members of our family away. Not a terribly technical hike but just lengthy… and the elevation a little cumbersome if you’re from the flatlands of Florida!
3. Grab a Bite at Morino Grill
When you’ve tuckered yourself out and need a bite, be sure to stop by the Morino Grill. It’s the only restaurant in the park, so they run the monopoly on sustenance for hungry hikers. The menu has all the hearty staples, so there’s bound to be something to hit the spot– especially since they maintain gluten free and vegan options.
It’s conveniently located next door to the Visitor Center, so it’s easy to get your national park passport stamped and snag any park mentos. Alaska’s tourism runs year-round, but the large majority of visitors arrive over the summer, so the Morino Grill is closed through the winter season.
4. Explore Denali from a Bird’s Eye View
Denali National Park and preserve stretches out to cover over six million acres. With such a vast magnitude, it’s impossible to see everything by foot. To expand your exploratory reach, a flightseeing tour can take you to new heights! This kind of aviation adventure was a humbling way to observe the magnitude of the Alaskan mountain range, see Denali up close, and appreciate the complete isolation of the Alaskan wilderness. While it’s guaranteed to be a breathtaking view regardless of what plane or helicopter you’re in, we explored with Talkeetna Air and could not recommend them more!
We actually landed on a glacier and were able to appreciate the immense landscape from the ground up. It is beyond humbling to realize how truly isolated one can be in the snowy Alaskan range– even in summer.
5. Visit the Denali Sled Dogs
Denali National Park remains steeped in its traditional roots and has maintained their pack of sled dogs since 1922. The temperature of the winter can make machinery unreliable, but the dogs thrive in the cold. They have the intuition a snowmobile lacks, which becomes life-saving in a white out or when avoiding dangerous ice. You can meet these hard working boys and girls at the kennels, just under two miles from the Visitor’s Center. Not only are there puppies to meet, but in the summer, you can pretend to drive a sled and learn more about the dog sledding culture.
6. Mush in the Park
While the park dogs will take your for a ride in the summer, they’re busy working in the winter time, so if you want a mushing experience, tracking down Denali Dogsled Expeditions is a must! They’re the only company that currently is permitted to offer dogsledding tours inside the park premises.
As we visited in the summer, this wasn’t an option, but we did have the opportunity to dogsled elsewhere. We can attest that it’s big cool to be pulled through the snow by eight very eager dogs.
7. Spend a Night Under the Stars
Looking for a fully immersive experience? Go camping! Denali doesn’t house a lodge with sleeping accommodations for guests, so if you’re looking to spend the night in the park, you better pack a tent!
There’s six campgrounds to choose from, with a whole world of backcountry camping available as well. The Riley Creek Campground is the closest to the entrance of the park and houses a shower and laundry facility— which can be rather nice at the end of a long day. As an additional bonus, the Riley Creek Mercantile is right next to the campground. It maintains a supply of items such as water bottles, bear spray, sunscreen, and such. They also sell sandwiches and some pre-packaged food if you’re in a pinch.
Some campsites can be booked in advance while others are first come, first serve only. You can find out more information about each campground here, to ensure you arrive prepared.
8. Bus or Bust!
Intra-Park Transit
There’s only one road through Denali National Park, so in order to mitigate traffic and parking snafus, there are free busses that transport visitors about 15 miles into the park, with their final stop at Savage River. If you’re keen to explore a bit further into the park, there’s an alternate bus options that will take you the rest of the 92 miles along Denali Park Road. This bus system has a nominal fee, depending on how far you plan to go. Both of these options are non-narrated bus rides, existing exclusively for transportation needs. As such, riders are free to disembark and re-board different buses as they please.
Narrated Tours
There’s a bus ride for everyone! For anyone less keen on transportation to a remote hike and more interested in a cultural history lesson, there’s a trained naturalist waiting for you. These tours run anywhere from 4 hours to 13 hours, depending on how deep into the park you’re looking to adventure. These bus options can be thought of as more of a paid tour— i.e. it will not stop at campgrounds and is not designed to ridden in a hop on/hop off style.
The Denali Park Road is 92 miles long, but landscape anomalies can close the road down, so be sure to check conditions out before you go.
Denali National Park and Preserve boasts some outstanding feats of nature, and we had such fun exploring the little slice we did. We stayed in this region for two nights and felt it was a perfect amount of time to explore the park and surrounding area. Our stop in Denali was part of a two-week road trip, exploring a beautiful sliver of the gargantuan state of Alaska. Check out the full itinerary here. Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Alaska is so immense it can be intimidating to even begin to plan a trip. With so much to see, where do you even begin? With endless mountain ranges and more coastline than the rest of the country combined, the views are unparalleled. Our two-week itinerary begins in Anchorage and explores up into Denali as well as down into the Kenai Peninsula. Whether it’s your first time visiting or your tenth, this action-packed adventure is guaranteed to delight. From North America’s highest mountain top to dog sledding to salmon fishing, and everything in between, our two week roadtrip through Alaska is a once in a lifetime experience.
We’ll walk you through our full itinerary. Not only did we love all our adventures, but we snacked hard and ate often throughout our trip too, so we have endless curated recommendations to share. We’ve compiled the perfect, robust trip to make the most of your time in Alaska!
Day 1
Touchdown in Anchorage
If you’re visiting in the summer, regardless of what time you land, you are almost guaranteed to have daylight to burn! We arrived mid-afternoon, so we picked up our Turo, checked into our rooms at the Holiday Inn Express, and headed downtown. 49th State Brewery has some lovely rooftop seating, so we put our name down on a waiting list and wandered through the downtown area as we waited for our table. We totally recommend this as the rooftop seating was well worth the wait, and a little exploration was a fun way to acquaint ourselves with a new area. The brewery’s beer and appetizers were all delicious, so you can’t go wrong.
Best Pizza Around
This actually kicked off our evening of eating as we picked the rest of the family up from the airport and took the hungry travelers to Moose’s Tooth. Not only was the pizza fantastic, but the desserts were quite memorable as well. As we bounced to different towns along our journey, we were rather surprised at how notorious this tasty pizzeria was. Once everyone’s belly was full, we headed to the hotel and turned in for the night.
Day 2
So It Begins
Getting a reasonable start to the day, we swung by the Walmart to get some snacks before we hit the road. While this doesn’t seem like anything special, a Walmart or a Safeway can be a hot commodity in some of the remote regions of the state, so we made sure to stock up on snacks before we left. From Anchorage, the drive up to Denali takes about 4 hours– potentially more, depending on construction traffic.
With food options along the way being limited, we just stopped at Subway, right off the highway, for some fast sandwiches. Once we arrived, we unloaded our bags at the Aurora Denali Lodge, and put our hiking shoes on. Inside Denali National Park and Preserve, we found the Horseshoe Lake Trail. With everyone in our large family group having varying levels of hiking endurance, this was a perfect hike for the whole family.
Gas Prices Too High
After working up an appetite, we headed back to endeavor on a unique dining experience. In an ode to a bygone era, we loaded up in a covered wagon for a dinner and a drive. Having never traveled by horse and buggy before, it was certainly a different experience. The covered wagon tour included so many family-style courses, everyone left stuffed to the gills.
While riding in a horse covered wagon was certainly a fun, different experience, it was a far less historic tour than we were expecting. The ideal clientele for this tour would be someone that’s particularly interested in horses. For our family, this was one of the only activities from our trip that we agreed that we probably wouldn’t sign up for again. Nothing bad happened, just not really worth the price of admission.
Fast & Furious
What to do instead? The same public trails the horses use for the covered wagon rides are also utilized by Denali ATV Adventures. If cruising on an ATV is more your speed, this makes for an awesome way to explore the area. The ATVs get where the covered wagons can’t and take you to some gorgeous overlooks and rushing riverbeds. Regardless of which adventure you choose, be sure to keep an eye out for moose! We saw quite a few when we were up in the Denali area! Due to the long daylight hours, tours tend to run later than they might elsewhere, so by the time the tour had concluded, we were zonked and ready for bed.
Day 3
Denali National Park & Preserve
The early bird gets the worm, and the early risers get an empty trail! On our third day, we aimed for an early start to the day to conquer the Mount Healy Overlook hike. The 7 miles with over 2,700 feet of elevation was an energizing kick in the pants. Being from Florida, one of the most amazing sights was how the mountains just seemed to stretch forever. This felt especially true from our elevated perch. Once we made it to the top, it was hard to leave.
Once we made our descent, we headed straight for the Morino Grill. As the only restaurant in the park, they run the monopoly on sustenance for hungry hikers. The menu has all the hearty staples, so there’s bound to be something to hit the spot– especially since they maintain gluten free and vegan options.
After lunch, we headed over to meet the Denali sled dogs. Alaska maintains steeped in its traditional roots, and sled dogs are an essential part of that culture. The temperature of the winter can make machinery unreliable, but the dogs thrive in the cold. They also have the intuition a snowmobile lacks, which becomes life-saving in a white out or when avoiding dangerous ice. It’s an honor to meet the eager working dogs that make the park what it is.
Rafting Around
Once we’d had our fill of mountainous hikes and sled dog snuggles, we headed down to Denali Raft Adventures for some white water rafting. Even in the summer everyone suits up in drysuits. Despite the warm temperatures during the day, the Nenana River stays a chilly 38 degrees. While things do heat up in the summer months, this causes the glacier and snow to melt, and the subsequent runoff is just as icy as you’d imagine.
Our family certainly welcomes a reasonable adventure, but we also aren’t a wiley group of adrenaline junkies, so the portion of the river we rafted was mostly class II and III rapids. It was perfect!! We had such fun paddling together and riding through the rapids. This is due in large part to our guide Kyle– he was truly outstanding!! Best rafting guide I’ve ever had. If you want to try white water rafting, but are a bit hesitant, this is a perfect group and river to try it on. It’s so engaging, with abundant, gorgeous views from the river.
Dinner Please
Afterwards, we found ourselves at Prospector’s Pizza for dinner. Parched from our day’s adventures, our server was rather impressed (or overwhelmed) with our abundant water consumption, so he brought out a carafe of water for each of us. Tasty pizza and excellent service from Frankie!!
Day 4
On the Road Again
Before we departed Denali, we swung by Black Bear Coffee House and discovered this hustling coffeehouse just might be the hub of this sleepy mining town! Not only do they serve a reliably good coffee, but they also offer a heavenly selection of gluten free and dairy free breakfast treats. An excellent morning pick-me-up!
The drive down to Talkeetna takes a couple hours, but drives seem to go by quickly with alluring scenery stretching out in front of you. Talkeetna is small, but it has a quaint collection of restaurants and shops spread out over a few blocks. We had some time, so we walked around a bit. The soups at Denali Brewpub were above-averagely delicious, as were the salmon burgers at the food truck next door.
Flying High
We made it to our appointment at Talkeetna Air Taxi just in time. Air taxi seems like an understatement… passage to a mystical mountain feels a bit more appropriate. Oh my goodness, your eyes won’t leave the window pane. Due to Denali’s elevation of over 20,000 feet, cloud coverage can disrupt the magnificent views from afar. When you’re in a plane, you’re afforded a more personal glimpse of this giant beauty. Not only is the mountain beyond immense, it is humbling to see hikers at base camp looking like small, colorful sprinkles on the expanse of white snow below.
After flying around for a bit, we actually landed on the glacier. That’s right, landed on a glacier. We were lucky enough to experience a myriad of amazing experiences during our trip, but this one easily makes the top five. It is truly amazing to have small moments to take in nature’s magnitude, and standing on an ancient glacier in the middle of the Alaska Range is certainly one of them. Guaranteed to be an experience you don’t regret and always remember. Depending on the pilot, one lucky rider gets to ride in the co-pilot seat, so be sure to speak up if you’re interested!
Pro tip: Even if you don’t usually get nauseous on plane rides, it’s not a bad idea to take some non-drowsy Dramamine before hand. We were rather surprised when half of us experienced vary degrees of nausea. This had nothing to go with the pilot’s flying— it was just an unexpected observation.
Back in Anchorage
The second leg of driving is another couple hours to make it back down to Anchorage. Making it back just in time for dinner, we snagged a table at Spenard Roadhouse. They recently revamped their menu, and we only have good tidings and empty plates to report back. After everyone was full, we headed to the Four Points by Sheraton and blissfully drifted off for the night.
Day 5
The Alaska Railroad
Riding on the Alaska Railroad is not only an amazing way to enjoy sightseeing, but it also carries a most charming nostalgic touch. With an array of destinations to choose from, we enjoyed coastal views on our way down to Seward. Leaving from Anchorage, our departure time was 6:45am, but they ask you to arrive about an hour early to ensure everyone has enough time to collect their tickets. The train ride lasted about four and a half hours, putting out arrival time in Seward right around 11:15 am.
We splurged a bit to be in the “gold star” section of the train, which provided access to an awesome open air viewing platform on the second floor of the train. The train ride would have been awesome regardless, but being able to experience the wind in your hair, one step closer to nature made this an unforgettable experience. Gold star perks also included two complimentary alcoholic drinks as well as breakfast in the reserved gold-star-only dining car. It was a truly lovely, nostalgic way to travel.
The Seward Sights
Once you’re in Seward, you have a few options. Due to its proximity to the Kenai Fjords National Park, you’re going to find a plethora of different tour options. Major Marine offers a 4-hour wildlife cruise that works perfectly with the train schedule. It departs at 12:30pm and returns at 4:30pm.
We actually looped back to Seward at the end of our trip, so we saved the cruise and headed down to the Alaska Sealife Center. This multifaceted hub is home to a research clinic as well as an aquarium of sorts. Not only is it fun to see arctic aquatic life up close and personal, but they also have a two-finger-touch tank to allow kids and adults alike an up-close experience with nature.
Good Eats
If you’re feeling a bit peckish, you have loads of restaurants to choose from. The Lone Chicharron Taqueria is going to have some fantastic tacos, while Gold Rush Bistro boasts an impressive bowl of clam chowder. Sweet Darlings has chocolates and gelato that are guaranteed to satisfy your sweet tooth. If you’re looking to crack open a cold one, Seward Brewing Company is an awesome local craft brewery.
Sampling different restaurants was easy because Seward is pretty compact. The main populus of the city stretches about a mile and a half long and is rather walkable. However, if you struggle with mobility impairments, Seward has a free shuttle to aid in transportation (and exploration!).
Historic Roots
The Iditarod is a nationally recognized race that has been taking place in Alaska for almost a century. Prior to being a race, the National Iditarod Historic Trail was used to transport mail and supplies from steamships into more interior communities. You can find the old Mile Marker 0 near the sealife center, with Resurrection Bay in the backdrop. If you’re interested in the roots of the iconic race, there’s a handful of statues and placards to read.
Before we left, we stopped by the Seward Museum (located in the community library), to learn more about the local history. An excellent stop any time, but especially if you’re looking for something to do on a rainier day. Departure time back to Anchorage was at 6pm, and the return trip is just a little shorter, with arrival back in Anchorage at 10:15pm. If you’re looking to get back a little faster, there’s also an option to take a coach bus back. Our dad is a train aficionado, so we knew he would love the train rides, but the Alaska Railroad was actually a top five favorite adventure from the trip for all of us. We highly recommend it!
A few notes
If you’re doing a shorter trip and looking to avoid renting a car, the train is an excellent alternate mode of transportation. They are able to transport luggage.
Additionally, since we were planning to drive around most of the Kenai Peninsula, the destination of the train ride was less important than the qualitative aspects of the train ride itself. If you’re thinking you want to ride the train to a city not on the itinerary, you could always take the train to Whittier. Alternatively, you could take the train up to Denali and back and rent a car for Kenai exploration once you return. The options are many— you can see a full list of depot locations here.
Day 6
After waking up rather early the day before, we enjoyed a nice restful morning, packed our bags, and hit the road. It didn’t take long to make it to Portage Lake, where we hopped on a Portage Glacier boat tour. The tour lasts about an hour and is narrated throughout. While we were out there, we watched a huge piece of the glacier calve off into the water below. They also had a chunk of glacier ice aboard the boat, so anyone interested in taste-testing a glacier could give it a try!
Reindeer, Bison, and Bears— Oh My!
We headed to the Alaskan Wildlife Conservation Center next, which is best described as Fantastic Beasts and Where to Find Them meets Alaskan wilderness. Alaska is home to such unique wildlife. While you will certainly encounter some wild animals as you explore, it’s a pretty awesome experience to see such large animals up close. There are bison, coyotes, reindeer, lynx, musk ox, black bears, brown bears, and elk… just to name a few!
A looped path leads you to the various enclosures, but most of the animals can be seen from a gravel road. This allows mobility impaired visitors to enjoy the animals as well. While it’s impossible to replicate an animal’s home environment, the conservatory does an excellent job providing large enclosures, with acres and acres of space for animals to roam. We stood less than three feet away from a brown bear (with a fence between us), and it was beyond thrilling. Definitely worth your time to stop and check it out.
Dinner with a View
Upon arrival in Girdwood, we unloaded at the Carriage House, changed, and headed off in search of food. The Seven Glacier Restaurant at the Alyeska Resort isn’t just dinner, it’s fine dining! Perched at the top of Mount Alyeska, this culinary experience is a reflection of the luxury the Alyeska Resort is known for. If you’re interested in eating here, it’s ideal to make your reservation in advance, because the tram ride up to the restaurant is complimentary this way ($38/person otherwise).
The namesake of the restaurant are the seven glaciers visible from its vantage point, but you will also love taking in the Turnagain Arm and the endless peaks of the Chugach mountains. Not only was the food and service impeccable, but the views were amazing as well.
Day 7
Dog Sledding
Our time in Alaska was filled with so many incredible adventures, but our jaunt with Alpine Air Alaska might just have been my favorite. We all loaded up into helicopters, and headed out to Punchbowl Glacier. Having never ridden in a helicopter before, it was a bit of a surreal experience. It’s wild to just be lifted straight up into the air! The ride to the glacier was short, but exceptionally beautiful. When we landed we were immediately greeted by eager little puppies. We got to walk around and meet all the puppies before we loaded up and took off on our mushing adventure.
The mushing dogs were a bit smaller than expected but they were so excited to get out after it. These dogs are used in the Iditarod Race, so they train to run at an endurance pace of 8-10mph. This past year, they ran for Gerhardt Thiart. Before the helicopter came to fetch us, we had a chance to talk to him about his experience running the Iditarod. This in and of itself was an amazing opportunity. All in all, it is truly a once in a lifetime experience to ride on a sled in the middle of a glacier, only accessible by helicopter, pulled by eight energetic puppies.
The Girdwood Scoop
The Bake Shop makes for a tasty lunch. A perfect stop if you have a hankering for soups, sandwiches or cinnamon rolls! Once you’re full of sustenance, there’s a handful of local hikes to explore. The Virgin Creek Falls hike is super short to a lovely waterfall, while the Winner Creek hike is a bit longer stretch to enjoy nature. If you’re looking to crack open a cold one after your hike, Girdwood Brewing Company is the spot of choice.
Our abode at the Carriage House was rather convenient for a few reasons. It’s certainly nice to eat out and have someone else do the cooking and cleaning up, but sometimes it’s nice to just make a meal at home. The full kitchen set-up gave us the space and tools to make meals with ease. The location was also rather convenient to go on a nice post-dinner walk. You can’t beat the scenery in Alaska!
Day 8
On our eighth morning, we packed our things and hit the road… Homer or bust! As is any given drive in Alaska, it was rather scenic, and we pulled off whenever anything struck our fancy to stop and look. With small bladders and endlessly hungry stomachs, we found the Safeway in Soldotna to be an excellent spot for a bathroom and snack break along the way.
The Scoop on ‘The Spit‘
Homer is a charming seaside town, and the most endearing part of the town was the Homer Spit. The spit is a long, thin peninsula of land that stretches out into the Kachemak Bay. Our hotel in Homer was the Land’s End Resort, at the very end of the Spit. We felt it was perfectly located to walk up and wander around all of the shops about a half mile away. And wander we did!
We had a tapas-style lunch, sharing entrees at various restaurants to sample the wide variety of options. Make no mistake, this is definitely a touristy area, but the shops had high quality locally goods and wares, as opposed to some of the usual cheap knick-knacks found in tourist shops. Of all the places we wandered through, Carmen’s Gelato was the family favorite. We found ourselves stopping by at least once (if not twice) every day we were in Homer!
We finished the day with dinner at the Fresh Catch Cafe, and boy was the food delicious. Kayla maintains a gluten-free and vegan diet, so often it was difficult to find non-salad or french fry meals for her, but they had an amazing curry that fit her dietary needs. Not only was her curry delicious, but they served one of the best fish and chip meals we ate all trip (and we sampled a bunch). The restaurant is on the smaller side, so if you have a big group, it’s not a bad idea to call ahead.
Day 9
Halibut Fishing
Homer is known to be an excellent spot for Halibut fishing, so if you enjoy the thrill of a day spent out on the boat reeling ‘em in, you’re going to want to find a fishing charter. Salvador and Kate spent the day out with Bob’s Trophy Charter, and this was Kate’s favorite adventure of the trip. With two guides and four other chartered fish-persons, there was a nice camaraderie to the group, without feeling overcrowded. Everyone bagged out for halibut and rockfish, taking home as much fish as possible!
Out & About
For those that didn’t go fishing, it was a day of exploration. The spit stretches on for a couple miles, so it made for a lovely morning walk route. The Homer Farmer’s Market is more centrally located, but we wandered up there and sampled some tasty coffee, cookies, popcorn, and Indian food. Kayla happened upon a honey stand that actually led us to our next stop.
Stoked Honey is a small, local honey farm that offers fun interactive tours of their property. After we were all honeyed out, we drove up to Homer Overlook Point to take in the Kachemak Bay from an elevated vantage point. I don’t think it would ever get old, looking out and seeing the stretches of water with the mountains on the horizon.
There’s a few spots on the Spit that will cook your catch for you, but Captain Pattie’s was an easy choice. They will cook your fish however you request and everyone gets their choice of side as well. Dinner is served family style, so everyone can pick and choose what they want. We had some outstanding seafood during our trip, but nothing compared to our freshly caught dinner. So delicious!!
Day 10
The Kenai River Fest was in Soldotna when we were passing through, so we stopped by to check it out for an hour or so. We also highly, highly recommend stopping by the Safeway for groceries while you are in Soldotna. “Real” grocery stores are few and far between in more rural parts of the Kenai, so be sure to have all your essentials before you head out into a food desert.
Cooper’s Landing is a great spot in the heart of salmon fishing season. Repeat, this is a great spot for people interested in doing some salmon fishing. If you’re all in on fishing, then Cooper’s Landing and more specifically, the Salmon Run Lodge is a great fisherman’s stay. The rustic log cabin was basic but roomy, and it had a full kitchen as well as a grill to make cooking a breeze. Additionally, they can help secure your fishing licenses and set up a salmon fishing excursion. As a bonus, the closest thing this town has to a grocery store is steps away!
For a small town, the Cooper’s Landing Brewing doesn’t mess around. Not only are their beers good, but they also have a nice outdoor seating area. Getting hungry? The Rod and Reel restaurant at the Kenai Princess Wilderness Lodge is just down the road and will have some tasty options for dinner, with views of the Kenai River in the backdrop. If you’re looking for a nice post-dinner walk, there’s walking trails near the lodge, waiting to be explored.
Day 11
Five Fab Fisherwomen
Rise and shine for an earlyyy morning on the river. The early bird may get the worm, but you have to be a really early riser to snag prime real estate for fishing. Our fishing guides came to pick us up at 4:45am, so we could be launching our boats by 5am. While the sun is certainly shining this early, that does not guarantee warmth! Salmon fishing is usually done in the water, and our fly-fishing was no exception.
We were a mixed bag of fishing experiences, but all of us loved the exciting thrill of catching a fish and reeling it in. There’s something about standing knee-deep in the river, fly-fishing your heart out, that makes you think “oh man, this is the Alaska fishing experience”. To make it even more surreal, we had a black bear come wander over to the waters edge to assess our fish situation. So crazy to see a wild bear— only in Alaska!
You may not think of packing your wool socks for a summertime trip, but your feet will get cold after a couple hours in the river!
Half Day vs Full Day
Due to the early morning start, a full day of fishing runs from 5am to 1pm, whereas a half day only goes to 9am. If you are a dedicated fisherman, you will want the whole day. We were moderately dedicated, and did a full day of fishing. We actually split the day into two experiences. In the morning, we learned how to salmon fish, and in the afternoon, we learned how to fish for trout!
If you’re thinking you want to give fishing a try for the heck of it, but are worried about your little piggies getting cold, the half day will be perfect for you! If you are stoked to get out and catch as many fish as you’re allotted, the full day will feel like it went by too fast. Regardless of how long you plan to be out on the water, remember to bring snacks!
Fresh Caught Dinner
When our “full day” of fishing finished around 1pm, we were all ready for an afternoon nap. Once our stomachs started getting hungry, we grilled up some of the salmon we caught! It was a perfect meal to share after all of our hard work. A gravel sidewalk across the street from our lodge made for a scenic evening walk to end the day.
Day 12
Flight-Seeing
On the twelfth day of our Alaskan adventure, we headed over to Moose’s Pass for a float plane tour with Scenic Mountain Air. Due to the size of the planes, we went up in two separate groups, and we were surprised at some of the different things we saw. The hour-long jaunt explored the south-central Kenai Peninsula. From our vantage point, we were able to see the Harding Icefield, Bear Glacier Lagoon, the Chugach Mountains, endless lakes and waterfalls, as well as a handful of wildlife sightings. Pictures cannot even begin to capture the beauty of this pristine, immense wilderness!
On the Hunt for Views
In the afternoon, we headed out for a bit of a wilderness adventure. Not far from Cooper’s Landing, the Skilak Lake Road Wilderness Drive is an 18-mile-long loop gravel road, known to be a good locale for spotting wildlife. Along the road, there’s a couple different places to pull off and hike. We took the Hidden Creek Trail to Skilak Lake, and were rather relieved that we didn’t run into any large wild animals while we were hiking. Late afternoon was a perfect time to go hiking, but if you wanted to see wildlife along the looped path, you would be better off going early in the morning, before the day’s traffic has started up.
While we didn’t see any wildlife on the drive, on our way back, we saw bears playing in the river along the side of the road. It was so worth making the effort to get out and enjoy nature. Seeing the bears playing the river together was one of the most simply amazing moments from our trip. A quintessential example of the nature Alaska is known for.
Day 13
Whatever Floats Your Boat
Heading out to the final city on our road-trip town, we hit the road for Seward. The drive went smoothly, and our luck continued when we were able to check into our hotel early and drop our bags off.
We had just enough time before our boat tour to swing by Safeway for some snacks and sandwiches. We moseyed on over to the dock, and made it to our Kenai Fjords Wildlife Cruise with time to spare. The setup on the boat was relaxing as each group was assigned to a “home base” table that they could store their things at and use as they pleased. In addition to the tables, there was ample space inside and on the decks for people to observe as they pleased.
We enjoyed a four hour tour from 12:30pm-4:30pm. We felt this was the perfect amount of time to see glaciers, fjords, and an outstanding breadth of wildlife. Our favorites were the puffins, humpback whales, seals, and mischievous otters.
Kayaking Queens
You can’t spend all day on the water if you don’t stay out into the evening! We suited up for a dusk kayaking trip to Bridal Veil Waterfall. Initially, it was almost intimidating to be out in the bay in such a tiny boat, but it was immensely serene to feel so small in the magnitude of nature’s magnitude. The interaction with nature is so much more intimate, with curious harbor seals popping their heads up a couple feet from our kayaks, checking out what we were up to.
We got to cruising and made it to our hiking spot in good time. The “hike” itself was more of a short, rugged walk to a pretty waterfall. It was nice to stretch our legs and reach a spot available only to supreme adventurers! Since we had already established our rhythm, we were a well oiled machine on our way back. The tour ran from 7pm to 10:30pm, so we were beyond pooped by bedtime!
A few notes
We didn’t have much guidance regarding attire for the kayaking trip, so we want to give you a leg up. You will not receive a drysuit for this aquatic adventure, so we recommend bringing your rain jacket and most waterproof pair of pants along.
While you won’t get soaked, the rain jacket keeps the water dripping off your paddle from progressively water-logging your sleeves (even in the summer, you will likely still want long sleeves on). You will have a kayak skirt on to keep a majority of the water out, but waterproof-ish pants will keep you comfy if some water infiltrates your skirt. Make sure you cinch that skirt up as high on your torso as you can!!
Day 14
Kenai Fjords National Park
Kenai Fjords National Park is the beloved backyard of Seward. Having already appreciated the park from above during our float plane tour, we were excited to explore with our boots on the ground. The hiking options in the park are limited to the Exit Glacier Overlook Trail and the Harding IceField Trail
Basically your hiking options are very easy or very challenging. We went hiking as a family, and decided on the two mile hike to Exit Glacier.
If you arrive at the park around 10am or 2pm, park rangers lead walking “tours” along the Glacier Overlook trail. While the 2.2 miles of trail doesn’t take that long to hike, they provide additional commentary and insight regarding the park, evolution of the glacier, and local preservation.
No advanced registration is needed, and there’s no cost associated with the walking educational opportunity.
The Kenai Fjords Visitors Center won’t be found on the park premises, but within the city of Seward itself. We stayed right across the street at the Gateway Hotel, which was beyond convenient to get our national park passports stamped and snag any park stickers we wanted. I also enjoyed chatting with a park ranger before we went to the park, to ensure I had a reasonable game plan before we left.
Shop ‘Til You Drop
While all of the hikes and activities are delightful, sometimes it’s nice to have some down time to wander and explore. Seward has a myriad of shops to meander through. While many of these places are certainly geared towards tourists, they offer a wide variety of goods from local small businesses and vendors. It’s always preferable when tourism money can be kept local! With Resurrection Bay as the backdrop, it’s easy to spend a couple hours walking through the city.
For being a small town, Seward has quite the collection of restaurants to choose from. We landed at the HighLiner Restaurant for dinner, and actually celebrated an early Father’s Day for our dad. With all of us living in different places, it was nice to share one final, delicious dinner all together.
Day 15
Departure day always seems to arrive too quickly. Depending on what time your flight is, you might have time for a bit more adventure. Since construction traffic can be unpredictable, it’s best to head back up towards Anchorage sooner rather than later. The drive felt like it went by pretty quickly— the silver lining to any drive in Alaska is that the scenery is guaranteed to be beautiful.
Once you’re back in Anchorage, you have some options for final explorations. The Anchorage Trolley Tour was far more interesting and informative than we originally expected. It was a cheeky, fun way to both see and experience Alaska’s biggest city. We ran out of time to visit the Anchorage Museum, but this would be an especially worthwhile stop for anyone interested in the ancestral heritage aspects of Alaskan culture.
The day goes by all too quickly, and before you know it, it’s time to head to the airport!
Things to Know Before You Go
Logistics
If you’re planning on doing a bunch of driving, an app like GasBuddy can be helpful to maximize your economy on gas prices. When we were leaving Homer we almost just filled up before we left, but Salvador found a gas station 20 minutes up the road that saved us 50¢ per gallon! We were driving two cars (one of which was a truck), so it was nice to not have wasted money unnecessarily!
Due to the long season of darkness and winter weather, the summer months are for getting construction work done. While we didn’t run into any schedule-ruining traffic, they are common in the summertime– especially as more and more tourists begin to fill the roads. We always left earlier than was necessary to account for the potential back-ups.
There’s a running joke that the mosquito is the state bird of Alaska. You won’t regret packing some bug spray or some light layers to keep your skin bite-free.
It may sound a little silly, but keep an eye on the clock for dinner! With long daylight hours and an action packed schedule, it’s easy for the day to get away from you. If you have a hankering for dinner at 9:15pm on a Tuesday night, your options will start whittling down quickly!
While we are all about supporting local small businesses and grocery stores, some towns in Alaska just don’t have them. It’s not like the Kenai Peninsula is a wilderness frontier, but stores like Walmart or Safeway aren’t as abundant as you may be used to. If you are a notorious snacker, be sure to stock up on your favorite treats whenever you’re in a “bigger” area.
Getting Your Catch Home
Don’t pay an arm and a leg to ship your fish home!! If you go fishing in Alaska and want to take your catch back with you, it may be more feasible than you think. Whatever city you’re fishing in has a processing company that will clean, filet, package, and flash-freeze your fish. When you pick it up, it will be packaged in a cardboard box with enough gel packs to keep your fish secure and frozen. This box is a perfect size to be a checked bag on your flight home.
If you are fishing at the end of your trip, you can just pick the fish up from the processing company right before you leave town. If you arrive at the airport early there’s a “valet” service at the airport that lets you keep your fish cold if you want to spend one last afternoon bopping around.
When you plan to fish at multiple towns throughout your trip, you just need to call ahead to your subsequent accommodations to ensure they have freezer space available for your catch. There may be a nominal cost to keep your fish frozen but this is a worthy investment! Sending about 50lbs of fish home will run you at least $450, if you do it through a company such as this one. There’s nothing wrong with that, and sometimes the convenience is certainly worth it! Inversely, we only paid about $100 per box to send our fish back home. Just a nifty “hack” to know about!
the wildest, wildest West
If you fancy time spent in the outdoors, nature’s magnitude, and an environment completely contrary to the norm, Alaska should be at the very top of your bucket list. It was amazing to enjoy a small part of this incredibly beautiful state.
Alaska is so huge, it can sometimes be difficult to decide where to visit. If you’re thinking you’re more keen to explore the Fairbanks to Valdez route, check out our 7-Day Camping Road Trip in Alaska.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Arches National Park is home to over 2,000 arches as well as a myriad of other astounding feats of nature. Conveniently placed near Moab, outdoor enthusiasts of all backgrounds find themselves drawn to explore the curious rock formations. Whether you’re planning an Arches-only trip or hitting up all the parks in Utah, you won’t regret adventuring to Moab and discovering the wild west that Arches showcases with such grandeur.
Not only are the various arrays of arches just incredible to see and stand under, but the views from the park, with the La Sal mountains in the backdrop, are astounding as well. Arches National Park is an incredible testament to the power and simple beauty of nature.
Fast Facts About Arches National Park
Size: 76,519 acres
Visitors: 1,806,865 (data from 2021)
Highest elevation: 5,653 feet at Elephant Butte
Distance from Moab: 13 miles — 20 minutes
Distance from Salt Lake City Airport: 240 miles — 4 hour drive
National Park Initiation: November 12th, 1971
While you could totally spend a week in Moab, between Arches, Canyonlands, and all the other fun Moab is known for, one or two days planned specifically for Arches National Park is enough to hit the highlights and feel like you robustly experienced the park. We tend to enjoy an action packed day, so the ideal itinerary might vary from person to person. Fitness level, time of year, and one’s desired Arches bucket list are all going to be factors that dictate just how long you should allot for this astounding and fantastic park. Below we have detailed how to ensure you are allowed into the park, our favorite hikes, the best spots to stargaze, and the scoop on camping in the park— as well as a handful of tips and tricks to ensure you have the best time.
Securing Your Timed Entry
Where to start? Let’s make sure you make it in the door! From 2009 to 2019, visitation to Arches grew over 66 percent, with most people arriving during the same peak hours each day. Due to this influx, the park has integrated an initiative to spread arrivals out (from 7am to 4pm) from April 1st – October 31st. The aim of the timed entry program is not to reduce the quantity of individuals visiting the park but to more evenly disperse their arrival throughout the day.
What exactly does timed entry mean? Prospective park visitors can reserve a 1 hour slot in which they will enter the park. These openings range from 7am-8am to 4pm-5pm. It is important to arrive at the park within your window otherwise your entry may be denied. Taking a last minute trip and worried you won’t be able to get in? Additional tickets are made available at 6pm MDT the calendar day prior. If you are having technical difficulties and are unable to secure any timed entry tickets, your other option would be arriving at the park before 6am or after 5pm.
Hike It Out
We actually almost skipped the Delicate Arch Hike because we thought it would be overcrowded, and I am so grateful we didn’t. While the park is home to a myriad of arches, Delicate Arch just might be the most iconic. Not only is Delicate Arch massively impressive, but the La Sal Mountains in the backdrop make it a beyond picturesque view. My favorite moment in the park was standing under Delicate Arch, looking out at the mountains. If you only have time for one hike, this should be it!
The Devil’s Garden Hike is quite the catch-all trail as it leads to an array of different arches. We utilized this trail to go all the way down to the Double O Arch, stopping at the Dark Arch, Landscape Arch, and Navajo Arch along the way. The viewpoints were certainly beautiful, but this hike was worth doing just for the views of the horizon. We also found some of the climbing and scrambling to be fun and adventurous.
It cannot be said enough, be sure you pack yourself enough water. Due to the long, unshaded nature of this trail, going earlier in the day is especially advisable, but if you are hiking in the afternoon, ensure you are prepared.
Campgrounds
Devils Garden Campground is the only campground available at Arches National Park. As such, its busy season is quite busy, and the 51 campsites go like hotcakes. Campsites can be reserved up to six month in advance between March 1 and October 31. In the low season, campsites are available on a first-come, first-serve basis. Campground facilities include drinking water, picnic tables, grills, and everyone’s favorite… flush toilets!
Hankering for a Snack
There is no lodge or restaurant in Arches, so be sure to bring along all the snacks and meals you might need. Arches’ close proximity to Moab makes tracking down sustenance daily easy. Grocery stores like City Market are the perfect way to make sure you have everything you need before embarking on your adventure. When you’re done exploring, nothing hits the spot like a cold treat on a hot day. There’s a handful of tasty-looking shops, but we can confirm that Moab Frozen Yogurt is a delightful little dessert desert oasis.
Starry Eyed
On a clear night, you can see the stars almost anywhere in the park. Areas off the main road prevent the headlights or people coming and going affecting your night vision and photographs. The farther north you drive into the park, the darker the sky will be. We initially drove to the Petrified Dunes Viewpoint but found the light pollution from Moab to be disruptive, so we hopped in the car and drove a bit farther to the Balance Rock picnic area.
While these points aren’t terribly far from one another, it made a huge difference in visibility. The best spots to stargaze are at Balance Rock, just past Balance Rock at either the Windows section or the Garden of Eden, and at Panorama Point.
If you have a flashlight or headlamp with a red light setting, bring it along! White lights can be harmful to your night vision, but the red lights are much more gentle. This is also respectful to any photographers out trying to capture pictures of the stars. Due to the long exposure necessary to photograph the stars, extraneous white light can be disruptive. If you have any star identification apps, they may be able to help you find constellations as well as the Milky Way.
As a note, Canyonlands National Park is about 45 minutes away from Moab, and therefore the light pollution of Moab. If you are a night owl with the evening flexibility, the stars will be even more amazing at its gold-tier International Dark Sky status.
How are Arches Made?
To be considered one of the park’s 2,000+ official stone arches, an opening of at least three feet must exist. This hole can stretch in any one direction, and there’s no requirement for width. For this reason, many of the arches in the park are so narrow, you might walk right past them as though it’s just a small hole in a stone.
The rock that makes up much of Arches is different layers of sandstone. Water takes advantage of cracks in rock surfaces and wears the sandstone down into fins. The park only receives 8-10 inches of precipitation per year. This doesn’t sound like much, but if the park were to receive too much more rain, the sandstone would potentially erode so quickly that the arches wouldn’t be able to form. The rain and snow that fall at Arches is a perfect quantity to erode the underlying rock at a sustainable pace to create the gorgeous sandstone arches.
The picture below are from the Arches Visitor Guide, which provides a more thorough explanation. If you have any additional questions about arches or any other geological features, be sure to ask a park ranger. We happened upon one whilst out on the Devils Garden trail, and found she was a wealth of information regarding various questions we had accumulated along our hike.
Pets
Everyone loves their furry friend, but pets can be quite disruptive upon entry into a new ecosystem. For this reason, pets must be on a leash 6 feet or less, and owners are responsible for picking up after their pet all areas in the park. The only places pets are welcome is on established roads or in parking areas as well as in the campgrounds and picnic areas. They are not allowed on any other trails, overlooks, wilderness areas, or in public buildings in Arches. (Service animals are the exception to these location restrictions.)
If you are going to be out hiking for any length of time, you should ensure you have packed sufficient water. Doing a longer trail? It’s never a bad idea to pack a snack or two to ensure you can keep up your stamina. If you’re not used to heat and elevation changes, it can fatigue you even more quickly on an empty stomach.
Get out early to avoid the heat of the day and the crowds. If you are an early bird, the earlier the better to afford you a bit more tranquility in the park and perhaps a stunning sunrise view. For any and all that do their best work in the afternoon, heading to the park around 3pm or 4pm will allow you to miss both the strongest UV rays of the day as well as all the morning park-goers.
Come Prepared
Pack your sunscreen… and perhaps a hat as well. Even if you are getting after it before the sun has reached its peak, the rays are strong, and sustained exposure will leave you burned!
Layers, layers, layers!! Despite the scorching hot temperatures during the day, the early mornings and evenings can still be quite chilly– plus the temperature can vary by elevation or lack of sun exposure (i.e. deep in a canyon). Even when visiting the summer, be sure to pack a few warmer layers!
A walking stick or trekking poles are never a bad idea. These are beneficial for any hike, but I was especially grateful to have mine when hiking Devil’s Garden!
While all national parks are home to outstanding feats of nature, Arches is perhaps the most uniquely mysterious. While science has a perfectly logical explanation as to how arches are formed, it still feels like nothing short of a miracle to stand under Delicate Arch, looking up. We hope you have a chance to make it out west and enjoy Arches in all its glory.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Zion was Utah’s first national park, and its luster has endured as it continues to be the most visited park in Utah as well as one of the most visited parks in the national parks system, with over 5 million visits each year. This 148,016 acre park has range, with abounding hikes for all difficulty levels as well as canyoneering, rafting, and rock climbing. Whether you’re planning a Zion-only trip or hitting up all the parks in Utah, you won’t regret spending two unforgettable days exploring the diverse topography and wilderness that make this vast park the crown jewel of Utah’s illustrious parks department.
Not only is the canyon astounding, but there are so many adventures to be had! There’s not many guarantees in life, but Zion Canyon is almost assuredly guaranteed to knock your socks off and leave you saying “WOAH“. How long do you need to take it all in? It depends on how full you want your days! Two days is enough to explore the park and leave feeling like you have an appreciation for the diverse wonders of Zion. Those will be two full days though!!!
Fast Facts About Zion National Park
Size: 232 square miles
Visitors: 5,039,835 visitors annually (data from 2021)
Distance from St. George Airport: 45 miles — 1 hour drive
Distance from Las Vegas Airport: 170 miles — 3 hour drive
National Park Initiation: November 19th, 1919 by President Woodrow Wilson
Zion is truly one of our favorite national parks. You can see pictures and have some appreciation for the magnitude, but there’s nothing quite like going and experiencing it for yourself. While all land protected by the National Park Service is important and beautiful in its own way, some parks are just most engaging to visit than others. Sometimes spending just an afternoon wandering around is enough to wet your beak and feel as though you saw the gist. That will not be enough at Zion!!!
Below we have detailed all of our favorite hikes, where to grab a bite, how-to’s for navigating transportation, where to bunk down, and beautiful drives— as well as all the tips and tricks that will ensure you have the best time.
When to Visit
Best time to visit is approximately from the end of May through June and September into early November. The weather gets so hot in July and August, it becomes hard to maximize your outside time. If you visit too early into the spring, you might not be able to do one of the most amazing hikes, the Narrows, as melting snow increases the flow rate through the canyon making it unsafe for visitors. There’s certainly beauty to visiting in the dead of winter, it just makes for a completely different experience!
We visited Zion at the end of May and felt it was the perfect time of year to visit! All the hikes were open and weather was as perfect as it could be!
Packing Essentials
water bottle — make sure you fill it before every hike!!
snacks — if you’re not used to heat and elevation changes, it can fatigue you even more quickly. it’s never a bad idea to have a little extra sustenance… plus who doesn’t enjoy a little treat as they take in the views??
hiking backpack — an 8-15L hiking backpack is usually pretty lightweight and it’s a nice not to worry about carrying your water bottle, phone, and snacks
trekking poles — a walking stick or trekking poles are never a bad idea. These are beneficial for a multitude of hikes, especially if you would consider yourself a little on the de-trained side. even for fit individuals, some of the elevation climbs can be a kick in the pants!
hat — some of the trails have very minimal shade, so it’s never a bad idea to bring a little of your own
Layers, layers, layers — despite hot temperatures during the day, the early mornings and evenings can still be quite chilly– plus the temperature can vary by elevation or lack of sun exposure (i.e. deep in a canyon)
waterproof backpack (optional) — if you own one, bring it! one of the must-do hikes is pretty water immersive, so having a waterproof backpack is nice. alternatively, you could always put anything you don’t want soaked in a ziplock or drybag
canyoneering boots (optional) — these are recommended for one of the planned hikes. there’s options to rent a pair if you don’t own them. alternatively you can get your hiking boots or trail runners soaked— you will just want to ensure you’re able to have them dry by the next day!
The Shuttle Scuttle
To minimize traffic through the park in busy months a free shuttle services run from March to November both in the park itself and in the adjacent town of Springdale. Both shuttles have nine stops. The shuttle in the park takes visitors to various areas in the park itself, while the Springdale shuttle transports people staying or parking in town up to the park entrance.
The Springdale shuttle service is more necessary than one might think due to parking in Zion typically being full by 8-9am. In the months the shuttles are running, Zion Canyon Scenic Drive is closed to private vehicles, so using the shuttle system is the fastest way to maneuver through the park– unless you’re keen to rent a bike! There are a plethora of shuttles running, so one is never waiting too long for their ride. No tickets are issued. People simply fill the buses on a first come first serve basis.
Staying hydrated throughout the day is incredibly important. Water-bottle refilling stations can be found at Zion Canyon Line shuttle stops 1,2,5,6, and 9.
Catching Some Zzzzzzs
There are loads of accommodation options when you’re visiting Zion because Springdale is close enough that it makes for a convenient base camp. The only thing more convenient? Staying in the park! In-park accommodations tend to either be very economical (camping) or a little on the spendier side (lodge living). Either way you have lots of options to choose from— you can explore them all below. It’s worth noting, both camping and the lodges will fill up quickly. If you know this is where you want to stay, book sooner rather than later!
Watchman Campground
Watchman Campground is only a ¼ mile away from the South Entrance of the park. While tent and electric campsites are available year-round, group campsites are only available from March to November. Due to Zion’s illustrious draw, campsites fill up quickly and this campground requires reservations year-round. Mark your calendar if you’re keen to camp here because campsites become available six months in advance… and they will go fast!
South Campground
South Campground is similarly convenient in location, only a ½ mile from the South Entrance of the park. Available March through October, tent, dry RV, and group campsites are available by reservation. Making a reservation is important as this campground is routinely full. Taking a more spontaneous trip? These campsites become available for reservation 14 days in advance, so even if the Watchman campground is full months out, it’s possible to snag a gorgeous, centrally located campsite.
Both of these campgrounds are alongside the Virgin River. Be sure to stop by the Visitor Center upon arrival to check the water quality as bacteria blooms can be toxic.
Zion Lodge
The Zion Lodge is located in the middle of the park, placing guests in the heart of the excitement. The longstanding lodge can be found on the National Register of Historic Places as it was built in the 1920s and has withstood the test of time… and fire! Abounding in historical character, the Zion Lodge offers 76 rooms, six suites, and 40 cabins for visitors to choose from. We loved the historic character of our little cabin abode.
A huge perk of staying at the Zion Lodge is that you are permitted to drive on Zion Canyon Scenic Drive up to the Lodge (a restricted area to all other park visitors late spring through fall). This access is allotted via a code, which must be provided for gate entry. Why does this matter? If your Lodge reservation check-in is Monday at 4pm, but you wanted to arrive at the park and hike before your check-in time, you are able to park your car (for free) at the Lodge for that entire day. It is also super convenient to be able to come and go from the park as you please without reliance on the shuttle!
◁ DAY 1 ▷
If you’re going to Zion, crushing a few hikes is a must. The sandstone cliffs are as exhilarating to hike as they are gorgeous to observe. With over 90 miles of trails available to explore, the opportunities for exploration are endless. The first day will primarily be focused on hikes, so pack your good hiking socks and get excited!
Angels Landing
Starting your day on a high note… literally! While views abound throughout the park, there are a few hikes Zion is renowned for. The first of which is Angel’s Landing. This steep hike was once thought to be inaccessible to humans, hence its name. In the time since, it has become a well worn path, with chains for anxious hikers to hold onto as they make their accent.
Before you make it to the chains, you have to get through the wiggles— a series of switchbacks not toooo far before the viewpoint you hit before you make the climb up the chains.
Due to this trail’s popularity, crowding started to become an issue, so the park launched a lottery permit system for interested visitors to throw their hat in the ring. If you’re planning your trip in advance, this is something you will want to look into because the lottery system operates on windows. For example, if you plan to visit between March 1st – May 31st, the lottery is open January 1st – January 20th.
If you are one of the lucky ones in the lottery, try to snag one of the early morning time slots. Clocking in at a little under 2,000 ft of elevation, with varying amounts of exposure, this is not a hike I would be keen to start at 1pm.
For those that don’t win it big in the lottery, hiking to the Scout Lookout via West Rim Trail provides a pretty comparable view. If you are hiking all the way up to Angel’s Landing, you must start the hike in your given time window. For those hiking to Scout’s Lookout, we recommend getting an early start— especially if you are visiting in the summer months.
Lodge Lunch
The lodge is centrally located in the park at shuttle stop 5, but it’s also a pretty easy walk from the Angel’s Landing trailhead. The Red Rock Grill can be found within the lodge, and it makes for a perfect spot to rest your weary legs while you chow down, with a variety of delicious plate options. We both devoured 1/2 pound burgers after hiking Angel’s Landing, and I can honestly say a burger has never tasted better!
As another option, the Castle Dome Cafe serves coffee and light breakfast bites in the morning as well as burgers and hot dogs and french fries throughout the afternoon. Some local microbrews can be found in the beer cart on the cafe’s patio. It’s a breezy spot to hang out, or you can grab food to go and eat it out on the green in front of the lodge.
Watchman Trail
After a little rest and recovery, it’s time for another hike! Easy to access from the Visitor Center, the Watchman Trail is an excellent afternoon hike. The overlook at the top boasts 360 degree views, including Temples and Towers, the lower Zion Canyon, and Watchman Peak. The proximity to the Visitor Center is convenient to ensure bladders are empty and water bottles are full before departing. This trail has zero shade, which makes it a perfect choice for a late afternoon hike. As an alternative, the sweeping views of the canyon, make The Watchman an awesome sunset spot as well.
Zion Canyon Village
Just outside the entrance to the park, you will find the Zion Canyon Village. The Zion Canyon Brew Pub has both a restaurant as well as a beer garden area for weary hikers to rest their bones. This makes for a perfect spot to go grab a beer and rest a bit after a day full of hiking!
Just around the corner, Happy Camper Market is a small scale grocery store. They also have a wide array of sports drinks if you need a little post-hike hydration. We do recommend swinging by to grab a couple pre-made sandwiches— only if your have a way to keep them cold! The hike for day 2 stretches on 8-10 miles, so it’s recommended to pack a lunch. Grabbing it the night before just makes it even easier to get out early and hit the ground running in the morning!
◁ Day 2 ▷
Just when you think the views can’t get more astounding, it’s time to embark on a whole new round of jaw-dropping canyon views. Today’s highlights take you a bit deeper into the park, so get ready for some outdoor fun!
The Narrows
Arguably Zion’s most unique and iconic hike, the Narrows is an adventurous trek through the most narrow section of Zion Canyon. It feels surreal to hike through the gorge, with sandstone walls stretching up thousands of feet, but what makes this hike even more one-of-a-kind is that over half the trek is spent walking– or rather wading– through the Virgin River. In the spring, the melting snow can make the water flowing through the canyon too dangerous for hikers to endeavor, so be sure to check the flow rate to get an idea of the feasibility of going. The Narrows closes down if the river’s flow rate exceeds 150 cubic feet per second (CFS).
OOTD
Even when the conditions are right, you want to be dressed to impress. Depending on the time of year you might be able to get away with wearing your hiking boots or trail running in the river, but canyoneering boots are the shoe of choice for extra stability. Equipment rentals, such as Zion Outfitter, will provide canyoneering boots, neoprene socks, a wooden walking stick, and dry pants (as necessary). If you are considering doing any substantial portion of the water-trek, we highly recommend either packing or renting this gear as it can make or break your experience.
Zion Outfitter is in the Canyon Village area, just outside the park. They are pretty flexible and will let you pick up your equipment rental the evening before if you’re hoping to get out early the day of your hike!
Hike it Out
Most park visitors hike the Narrows bottom-up, and this does not require a permit. Hiking from the bottom up means starting at Temple of Sinawava (shuttle stop #9) and hiking as far as Big Spring. The beauty of the bottom-up hike is that there is no specific viewpoint you are hiking to, because hiking through the canyon itself is the view. This means you could spend an hour hiking or you could spend all day! A true choose-you-own-adventure kind of hike.
An early start to the day is advisable. Due to the popularity of this hike, it will get crowded. The silver lining is that even in the middle of the day, the farther you hike into the canyon, the less people you will see.
map via www.zionguru.com
We made it to right around where Wall Street end before we decided to turn around. On our way back, we detoured down towards Veiled Falls. We definitely got wet, but it was such an awesome day of trekking, exploring, and climbing around.
Be sure to check the weather before you go hiking– especially if you plan to hike a slot canyon, like the Narrows. Even little rain can be dangerous because water levels rise exponentially faster, making flash flooding a real risk. The National Weather Service monitors ten park areas in southern Utah for likelihood of flash flooding and issues each one a flash flood potential rating. Checking for likelihood of flooding as well as keeping an eye on imminent weather is super easy to do, and just might save your life!
Taking It Low & Slow
Time to give your legs a break! Many of Zion’s most popular hikes can be found along Zion Canyon Scenic Drive; however, this section of the park only makes up a portion of the national park. Directly after crossing over the Canyon Junction Bridge a left turn will lead to the limited access scenic drive; however, if you continue straight, the road becomes Zion Park Boulevard also known as the Mount Carmel Highway. This winding road leads to some absolutely breathtaking views of the canyon.
After a long (but fun!!) morning and afternoon hiking adventure, the slower pace of a beautiful drive is a most relaxing way to finish the day.
As an alternate option, the Lodge also offers narrated tram ride tours late spring through fall. These tours traverse Zion Canyon Scenic Drive, showcasing keystone areas of the park with a colorful commentary throughout. As a note, this tram ride differs from the free shuttle rides.
If you’re legs are still feeling strong and you’re more interested in pedaling around, bikes are available to rent mid-March through November. Safety first, safety always! When you rent a bike, it will also include a helmet, safety vest, and bike lock. Additionally, all bikes are conveniently equipped with a front basket, safety lights, and a bell, so you will be prepared for all situations!
Sunset & Stargazing
The Zion Human History Museum is just north of the Visitor Center, and its patio provides great sunset views overlooking Bridge Mountain and the East Temple. Once the sun has set, the patio continues to serve looks, with expansive night sky stretched out above you. If you’d rather take a stroll as you take in the heavens, the Pa’rus Trail is an excellent option for both sunset and star gazers. Canyon Junction Bridge was once a lovely spot to watch the sun set, but it now has signs up prohibiting pedestrian loitering (park rangers will patrol the area around sunset to make people move).
Despite all the rush of snagging a top notch sunset spot, Zion’s grandiose topography prevents visitors from actually watching the sun settle into the horizon. The sunset hour still affords enviable views as the cotton candy colored clouds and watercolor sky make for a gorgeous backdrop to the tangerine canyons as the sunlight fades.
Zion goes to lengths to preserve the dark night sky that makes for excellent stargazing. Due to this dedication, there is very minimal outdoor lighting to illuminate your path, after the sun sets. If you’re planning to be out after sunset, be sure to bring a flashlight with you.
views a long the Pa’rus Trail
They say a picture’s worth a thousand words, but no picture truly captures how immense Zion Canyon is. The national parks system protects some of the most beautiful niches of the country, and Zion is a crown jewel in this collection. Let us know what you think of this immense testament to nature’s grandeur.
Zion is one of five national parks in Utah. Be sure to check out Bryce Canyon, Arches, Capitol Reef, and Canyonlands as well, to truly appreciate all of the Utah national park topography!
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
Canyonlands National Park, a nearly 337,600 acre desert in southeastern Utah, is known for its rugged landscape carved by the Colorado and Green Rivers. As the largest national park in Utah, it boasts four distinct regions of the park, each with its own exceptional topography. With panoramic overlooks, towering spires, and a plethora of remote canyons scattered throughout, Canyonlands has range. Whether you’re planning a Canyonlands-only trip or hitting up all the national parks in Utah, you won’t regret exploring the unique landscape in this diverse desert wilderness: from mesas to mazes and everything in between.
Below we will detail the three districts of the park, the best hikes, beautiful drives, and some excellent camping options— plus some of our best tips and tricks for making the most of your time at Canyonlands!
Fast Facts About Canyonlands National Park
Size: 337,570 acres
Visitors: 733,996 visitors annually (data from 2019)
Highest elevation: 7,180 feet — Big Pocket in the Needles District
Distance from Moab: 30 miles — 35 minute drive
Distance from Salt Lake City: 250 miles — 4 hour drive
National Park Initiation: September 12, 1964 by President Lyndon B. Johnson
The Districts
Canyonlands has three separate districts that combine to form a truly diverse park— in addition to the two rivers that create the boundaries of each district (these rivers are considered a fourth district). Whether you’re excited to explore renown hikes or keen on a slice of remote silence, you’re sure to find adventure in this primitive desert ecosystem.
Island in the Sky
The ‘Island in the Sky’ district is aptly named as the mesa rests on a sandstone pedestal. Sheer cliffs elevate this district over 1,000 feet above the surrounding landscape. Island in the Sky is the most popularly visited district, largely due to its proximity to Moab.
Hikes & Sights
Whether you’re planning on spending a few hours here or a few days, there’s a myriad of overlooks and hikes to explore. The Mesa Arch Trail is a short, easy hike to a unique arch with a picturesque background. It also makes for a great spot to watch the sun rise! The Grand View Point Trail is an awe-inspiring hike with constant views for the entire nearly 2-mile hike. Similar in length and oftentimes less crowded, the White Rim Overlook Trail showcases a panorama of canyons with the La Sal mountains as a backdrop.
If you’re keen on mountain biking, the White Rim Road is an illustrious path for any biker up to the challenge. While the road can get rather steep and strenuous in some places, you will be afforded spectacular views in spades. The harder you work for it, the more rewarding it is!
For those with mobility-impairments that make long walks challenging, the Green River Overlook provides stunning perspective, without any wear and tear on the joints. Or perhaps take it all in from your car. Grand View Road stretches about 19 miles and makes for a meandering exploration of Canyonlands, coasting past many popular viewpoints!
Camping Out
There is no lodge in the park, so if you want to stay in the park, plan on camping. The Island in the Sky campground, Willow Flat, is open year-round and offers 12 sites, on a first-come, first-serve basis. Looking to get a room with a view? The gorgeous Green River Overlook is adjacent to the campsite. The nightly camping fee is a very reasonable $15 per site, and sites fill quickly in the spring, summer, and fall seasons. Campground amenities include toilets, picnic tables, and fire rings in the campground. While there is no water at the campground, drinking water can be found outside the visitor center.
The Needles
Exploration station
Needles makes up the southeast corner of Canyonlands. It is named for the colorful spires that proliferate this region of the park. This part of the park is best suited for visitors with a bit more time on their hands as it’s a bit further of a drive from Moab than Island in the Sky— farther, but worth the drive! The extensive trail system in this district offers abundant opportunities for day hikes and overnight trips. Driving up to the Big Spring Canyon Overlook is an easy way to check out the northern part of the district, while hiking the Chesler Park Viewpoint Trail is a breathtaking way to explore the more southern region.
Camping Out
The Needles Campground is open year-round and has 26 individual sites as well as 3 additional group sites. The nightly camping fee for an individual site is $20. Spring through fall, visitors can reserve individual sites and group sites, but the remainder of the year, these sites are first-come, first-served. This campground has toilets, picnic tables, and fire rings in the campground to facilitate your camping experience.
The Maze
You won’t find a Visitor Center in the Maze as this part of the park is remote and all roads are unpaved. A four-wheel-drive vehicle is a must if you want to come exploring out here. Bring your patience and best boy-scout skills, because being self-sufficient in the outdoors is important to staying safe in this region of the park. This is no joke– the Maze is where Aron Ralston was stuck and his determined survival inspired the movie 127 Hours!
The most historically remarkable hiking in the Maze is to Horseshoe Canyon, renown for its historic yet beautiful American Indian rock art. Hikers make the seven mile trek to the ‘The Great Gallery’ to observe the intricately drawn, life-sized figures that act as a living memory to a bygone civilization. While we weren’t quite hardy enough to make the trip, it seems like a surreal experience to take in this slice of history.
The Rivers
The Colorado and Green rivers wind through Canyonlands, slicing through centuries of sandstone to separate the park into its three distinct districts. These rivers are generally calm, flowing south until they intersect at The Confluence. Both the Colorado and Green rivers are ideal for a canoeing or kayaking adventure— before they meet at the Confluence. Once combined, their subsequent flow through Cataract Canyon creates a world-class stretch of white water rapids. The rapids range from class II to V, giving adrenaline junkies quite the rush with its powerful speed. Unless you are very confident rafting, it’s always best to explore white water rapids with a guide!
Star Light, Star Bright
Staying in Moab and hoping to catch a glimpse of the starts? Canyonlands will provide the best views in the Moab area. While it is a bit more of a drive than nearby Arches, this extra distance means even less light pollution from near-by Moab. The starry night skies are actually so pristine, the park received a Gold-Tier International Dark Sky Park designation.
Pets
Pet-companion trailblazing is limited at Canyonlands due to the sensitive desert ecosystem and extreme temperatures. Pets must be on a leash at all times when outside a vehicle, for everyone’s safety. Pets are welcomed at the developed campgrounds in Island in the Sky and The Needles districts and along paved roads. It is not permitted to bring your pet with you on any of the hiking trails or to the overlooks. While the backcountry does tend to be less populated, pets are also unwelcome on the backcountry rivers and roads.
Plan Smarter, Not Harder
The Elements
If you are going to be out hiking for any length of time, you should ensure you have packed sufficient water. Doing a longer trail? It’s never a bad idea to pack a snack or two to ensure you can keep up your stamina. If you’re not used to heat and elevation changes, it can fatigue you even more quickly on an empty stomach.
Get out early to avoid the heat of the day and the crowds. If you are an early bird, the earlier the better to afford you a bit more tranquility in the park and perhaps a stunning sunrise view. For any and all that do their best work in the afternoon, heading to the park around 3pm or 4pm will allow you to miss both the strongest UV rays of the day as well as all the morning park-goers.
Pack your sunscreen… and perhaps a hat as well. Even if you are getting after it before the sun has reached its peak, the rays are strong. Sustained exposure will leave you burned!
If you’re keen on a bit more information, but don’t want to sift through the National Park Service Website, the Visitor Guide is an awesome resource with everything you need to know about Canyonlands in one place.
Canyonlands provides a cornucopia of opportunity for outdoor exploration. Whether you’re into hiking, rock climbing, back country camping, rafting, or biking, outdoor recreation abounds. What adventure are you most intrigued to pursue out in this desert wilderness escape?
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Capitol Reef National Park is the youngest of Utah’s five national parks, with its inception in 1971. The south-central desert park is home to an impressive, nearly 100-mile Waterpocket Fold. This wrinkle in the earth’s crust breathes life into high desert ecosystems and some enduring historic orchards. Whether you’re planning a Capitol Reef-only trip or hitting up all the parks in Utah, you won’t regret exploring the immense sandstone canyons and savoring breathtaking panoramic views that make this desert oasis unique. With so much to explore in this expansive yet underrated park, making the most of your time is a priority!
Not only does this area boast unique geography, but it’s also steeped in rich history. From historic farming practices to trails named after infamous outlaws, Capitol Reef remains intriguing.
Fast Facts About Capitol Reef National Park
Size: 243,921 acres
Visitors: 1,226,511 visitors annually (data from 2019)
Highest elevation: 8960 ft — in upper Deep Creek drainage near Billings Pass
Distance from Salt Lake City Airport: 220 miles — 3.5 hour drive
National Park Initiation: December 18th, 1971 by President Richard Nixon
Below we have detailed our favorite hikes, beautiful drives, stargazing walks, where to bunk down, and an unexpected spot to grab a snack— as well as all the tips and tricks that will ensure you have the best time.Where to begin? Start by getting your boots dusty! There’s nothing like a hike to take in the sights and put yourself in the heart of nature.
Top Hikes
What’s a visit to a national park without a hike? Capitol Reef has dozens of hikes to choose from in the various regions of the park. We have highlighted a couple we loved and thought maximized hiking time— plus one on our list to tackle next time we visit.
The Cassidy Arch Trail is a nice afternoon challenge, with an elevation gain just shy of 700 feet. It offers gorgeous views of not only the Cassidy Arch but of the waterpocket fold as well. Hiking to a viewpoint is always rewarding, but this hike showcases dramatic views the whole time! A few spots along the trail can be a little hard to follow, but the cairns placed throughout ensure no one wanders too far from the trail.
The Grand Wash Trail is an easy flat trail, with virtually no hiking to be done. With minimal elevation change, this long walk, is probably about as kid-friendly as it gets here. Easy to find, it starts from the same parking lot as the Cassidy Arch Trail. The Grand Wash Trail has been likened to the Narrow hike in Zion… without the water. It will make travelers of any size feel tiny in comparison to the staggering canyon walls.
The Navajo Knobs Trail is one of the more strenuous hikes in the park, clocking in at a little over nine miles round trip and over 2,100 feet of elevation. While we didn’t have time to explore this stretch, the trek appears to more than worth it— delivering spades of top-of-the-world feels.
Scenic drive
If you’re less inclined to hike, perhaps a scenic road trip is more your speed. Capitol Reef offers a virtual “guide” of sorts, available on their website. This 8 mile drive takes about an hour and a half and takes visitors through some of the park’s highlights. Be sure to pull the webpage up before you leave (service can get spotty), so you can read a little background information and history on various spots along your drive.
Perhaps you don’t have time for the full scenic drive but want to sneak in one last view before you leave? Two miles west of the Visitor Center, Panorama Point and Gooseneck Point stand 800 feet above the Sulphur River. These viewpoints showcase the millions of years of erosion it took to carve out the canyon.
If you are going for an evening drive, you have certainly picked the correct place. Capitol Reef is a designated International Dark Sky Park due to the opportunity to experience near-pristine night skies. Visitors can snag night sky charts from the visitor center, to aid in stargazing. No gatekeeping the best stargazing spots— a list, organized by district, can be found here.
Camping
Capitol Reef National Park does not have a lodge or restaurant, so if you want to eat, pack a lunch, and if you want to sleep, bring a tent! There are three campgrounds in the park: one developed and two primitive. The campgrounds are each found in a different district of the park.
Fruita Campground
The Fruita Campground is located in the Fruita Historic district, and it is open year-round. It is the only developed campground in Capitol Reef National Park. This campground might just feel like a slice of heaven, surrounded by historic orchards, with the Fremont River running nearby.
In this campground, there are 71 sites. Each site has a picnic table and either a fire pit or above ground grill (a handful have both), but no individual water, sewage, or electrical hookups. There are restrooms with running water and flush toilets; however, there are no showers. Campers visiting from March 1st to October 31st must make a reservation— up to 6 months in advance to ensure availability. For the remainder of the year, all campsites are available on a first come, first serve basis.
Cathedral Valley Campground
The Cathedral Valley Campground is exactly where one might imagine it, in the Cathedral Valley District— at the northwestern-most point of the park. This campground has six sites, each with their own picnic table and fire grate. There is a pit toilet, but no water available. As this is a primitive campground, there is no cost or need for reservations. Campsites are available year-round on a first-come, first-serve basis. It’s important to note, access to this campground requires a high clearance four-wheel drive vehicle, and is occasionally inaccessible due to recent weather. Be sure to stop by the visitor’s center to ensure you don’t encounter any undue surprises.
Cedar Mesa Campground
The Cedar Mesa Campground is found in the Southern Waterpocket district, about 25 miles south of the Visitor Center. Up at a cool 5,500 feet elevation, this campground has five sites, each with their own picnic table and fire-grate. There is a pit toilet, but no water available. As this is a primitive campground, there is no cost or need for reservations. Campsites are available year-round on a first-come, first-serve basis. Usually two–wheeled vehicles are able to access the Cedar Mesa Campground, it too will occasionally become inaccessible due to weather. Be sure to stop by the visitor’s center to ensure you don’t encounter any undue surprises.
Special Programs
Capitol Reef National Park offers a handful of programs to facilitate visitors’ exploration. Program availability fluctuates given time of year and current staffing. Check out the visitor center or campground bulletin boards for more details upon your arrival.
Kids and adults alike can learn more about the geologic story of Capitol Reef in a 30 minute Geology Talk from a park ranger. Guided hikes are less of a plan-in-advance adventure, and more of a see-if-it-works-out option. Hour and a half long hikes are led to various locations in the park, but be sure to stop by the visitor center for schedules and meeting points.
Hoping to catch a glimpse of the Milky Way? Its International Dark Sky Park designation makes this a world class spot for stargazing. These tours usually run about thirty minute and are typically offered near the new moon, to maximize the dark sky. As the moon waxes back to its full muster, Full Moon guided walks are offered. These tend to be a little longer, running about an hour and a half.
Orchards
Capitol Reef is home to a few gorgeous orchards, bearing cherries, apricots, peaches, pears, and apples. Trees in bloom are always beautiful but in the middle of the desert, these fruit trees feel like an oasis.
In the late 1800s, Latter-Day Saints planted thousands of trees in the fertile Fremont River Valley. The remaining trees are remnants of this pioneer community in Fruita, making these historic orchards the bearers of heirloom fruits. These orchards remain ignorant of current farming practices as they are maintained year-round with historic cultural irrigation practices, pruning, pest management, mowing, planting, mapping, and grafting. Prioritizing the robust preservation of these orchards remains an important goal for Capitol Reef National Park, as Fruita has been fondly nicknamed “Eden of Wayne County”.
Snack Time
When the trees are bearing fruit, park visitors are allowed and encouraged to pick the fruit. You will know an orchard has ripe fruit, ready for harvest when you see a “U-Pick Fruit” sign.
Fruit pick from the orchard must be paid for, but this done with ease with a self-pay station, scale, and fruit price list located near the entrance of the orchard. Caring for these orchards with historic farming practices is a time intensive job, so all proceeds of fruit picked is invested back to support the preservation of these historic orchards.
Respect Mother Nature
A couple tree-care kindness reminders: do not climb the fruit trees or hang hammocks between them. While the unattainable apple at the top of the tree always looks the most delicious, you do not have to climb the tree to reach it. Ladder and pickers are available to help with the just-out-of-reach sweet treats. Additionally, an orchard sounds like the perfect place to string up a hammock and take a nap, but this is not permitted as fruit trees are easily damaged. If you are interested in learning more about these beautiful, historic orchards, you can do so here.
The 411 on Four-Legged Friends
In Capitol Reef, pets are permitted, but they are only allowed in the developed areas of the park, and must always be on a leash. Wonder what is included in this list of developed areas? More than you might think! Pet are permitted on the trail from the visitor center to the Fruita Campground, on the Fremont River Trail, in unfenced or unlocked orchards, in the Chestnut and Doc Inglesby picnic areas, in campgrounds, within 50 feet of roads (paved and dirt) open to public vehicle travel, and in parking areas open to public vehicle travel. Pets are not welcomed on other hiking trails, in public buildings, or in the backcountry.
Plan Smarter, Not Harder
The Elements
If you are going to be out hiking for any length of time, you should ensure you have packed sufficient water. Doing a longer trail? It’s never a bad idea to pack a snack or two to ensure you can keep up your stamina. If you’re not used to heat and elevation changes, it can fatigue you even more quickly on an empty stomach.
Get out early to avoid the heat of the day and the crowds. If you are an early bird, the earlier the better to afford you a bit more tranquility in the park and perhaps a stunning sunrise view. For any and all that do their best work in the afternoon, heading to the park around 3pm or 4pm will allow you to miss both the strongest UV rays of the day as well as all the morning park-goers.
Pack your sunscreen… and perhaps a hat as well. Even if you are getting after it before the sun has reached its peak, the rays are strong and sustained exposure will leave you burned!
Ridin‘ Dirty
If you are going down to Utah for a national parks tour, you won’t be disappointed to have rented a higher clearance car. We were able to get by with a sedan, but if we were to do it again, we would have a higher clearance car— especially for this park! Of the five parks in Utah, we found Capitol Reef to be the most rural.
Capitol Reef is visited less than some of Utah’s other illustrious parks, but that’s what makes it a perfect spot. With over 1 million people visiting annually, you will certainly see other visitors exploring , but the remote nature of Capitol Reef limits the crowds. Be sure to add this technicolor desert escape to your bucket list!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Bryce Canyon National Park is a striking landscape of towering red rock formations, known as hoodoos, that create a surreal and otherworldly setting. Located in southern Utah, the park offers visitors an array of hiking trails, scenic viewpoints, and unique geological wonders shaped by millions of years of erosion. Whether you’re catching an unforgettable sunrise or exploring the iconic Navajo Loop Trail, our perfect day in Bryce Canyon provides an unforgettable experience for nature lovers, photographers, and outdoor enthusiasts seeking adventure amidst its vibrant, rugged terrain.
How many days should you plan to spend in Bryce Canyon? If you’re really keen to do a bunch of hiking, you could spend a few days here, but one day in Bryce Canyon is enough to leave feeling like you’ve really experienced the park. Even if you’re not typically an early riser, you won’t regret peeling yourself out of bed to catch the sunrise over the amphitheater. It might just be the most breathtaking way to see the park!
Fast Facts About Bryce Canyon National Park
Size: 35,835 acres
Visitors: 2,354,660 visitors annually (data from 2022)
Highest elevation: 9,115ft at Rainbow Point and Yovimpa Point
Distance from Las Vegas Airport: 270 miles — 4 hour drive
Distance from Salt Lake City Airport: 275 miles — 4 hour drive
National Park Initiation: February 25th, 1928
Fun Fact: Bryce Canyon is home to the largest concentration of hoodoos on Earth!
The hoodoos and spires that abound throughout the canyon are almost miraculously formed by rain, snow, and ice. If you have questions about anything, be sure to ask a park ranger for a more in depth explanation! They are truly an awesome resource.
Below we have detailed all of our favorite hikes, all the best viewpoints, how-to’s for navigating transportation, and where to bunk down— as well as all the tips and tricks to ensure you have the best time.
Packing Essentials
water bottle — make sure you fill it before every hike!!
snacks — if you’re not used to heat and elevation changes, it can fatigue you even more quickly. (FYI: Bryce Canyon is up at over 8,000 feet of elevation) it’s never a bad idea to have a little extra sustenance… plus who doesn’t enjoy a little treat as they take in the views??
hiking backpack — an 8-15L hiking backpack is usually pretty lightweight and it’s a nice not to worry about carrying your water bottle, phone, and snacks
trekking poles — a walking stick or trekking poles are never a bad idea. These are beneficial for a multitude of hikes, especially if you would consider yourself a little on the de-trained side. even for fit individuals, some of the elevation climbs can be a kick in the pants!
hat — some of the trails have very minimal shade, so it’s never a bad idea to bring a little of your own
Layers, layers, layers — despite hot temperatures during the day, the early mornings and evenings can still be quite chilly– plus the temperature can vary by elevation or time of day (i.e sunrise can be pretty chilly, even in the summer)
A Good Night’s Rest
Perhaps the most important part of maximizing your time in a busy day? Getting a good night’s sleep! There are certainly accommodations nearby when you are visiting Bryce Canyon, but what’s more convenient than staying in the park?? In-park accommodations tend to either be very economical (camping) or a little on the spendy side (lodge living). Either way you have great options to choose from. It’s worth noting, both camping and the lodge will fill up quickly. If you know this is where you want to stay, book sooner rather than later!
Campgrounds
There are two campgrounds found in the Bryce Canyon National Park. In addition to these two areas, rugged backpackers are able to go backcountry camping along the Riggs Spring Loop and Under the Rim Trail. Camping along the trail requires attaining a first come, first serve permit, up to 48 hours in advance.
The North Campground
The North Campground can be found right across the street from the Visitor’s Center, so it’s hard to miss! This campground has 100 sites that are spread out over 4 loops. If you are planning to go camping May 27th through October 1st, you must make a reservation, up to six months in advance. If you are planning to visit October 2nd through May 26th, campsites are available on a first-come, first-served basis.
Campflare is an awesome website/app resource that can help you snag a campsite in a full online reservation-based campground, if you’re planning a last-minute trip.
The sunset campground
The Sunset Campground can be found not far from Sunset Point. This campground boasts 99 sites, divided into 3 loops– one of which is primarily for RVs, the other two, tent-camping only. This campground is available on a first come first serve basis April 15th through October 31st, and is closed throughout winter (i.e. the rest of the year)
The Lodge
If your idea of rustic accommodations are less tent and more log cabin, the Bryce Canyon Lodge is the place for you. The lodge and cabins were built in 1925, and the exterior of the buildings has undergone minimal change in the time since they were built. These historic accommodations are available to visitors mid-spring through late fall. Due to its convenient location inside the park, rooms go quickly. Reservations can be made up to 13 months in advance.
photo via www.nps.gov
Free Shuttle Anyone?
Bryce Canyon operates a free shuttle around the Bryce Amphitheater, from April 5th to October 20th. No advance reservation required. The shuttle runs from 8am – 6pm with extended hours until 8pm from May 10th to September 22nd. If you want to plan your inter-amphitheater shuttling, you can track the shuttles here.
When the park gets crowded, this can be an awesome way to maneuver around without the classic fear of not being able to find a parking spot. This is also super helpful to any over-eager-turned-quickly-humbled hikers that might want a bit of a lift back to their car.
◁ One Action Packed Day ▷
Get ready for a little bit over everything at Bryce Canyon! An unforgettable sunrise, a couple memorable hikes, bird’s eye view overlooks, and a relaxing sunset to end the day. Bryce is home to the largest concentration of hoodoos anywhere in the world, so this truly is a one-of-a-kind park.
If you need help orienting yourself in the park or want a map you can save to your phone, you can find that here.
Sunrise
Catching sunrise in the summer months can be quite the endeavor as long days mean early sunrises. The sunrise in Bryce Canyon is worth pulling yourself out of bed for!! Inspiration Point affords an incredible view of the sun peaking over the mountains, illuminating the technicolor amphitheater. The Rim Trail connects Inspiration Point and Bryce Point, and makes for a beautiful Sunrise hike.
A portion of the hike is perfect for an early morning walk, but the trail stretches 11.0 miles. With only one day in the park, we recommend just going to Bryce Point and back, to save your legs for another awesome hike.
Don’t stress if you’re running a bit late for the sunrise. While the time for the sunrise is set according to when it rises over the horizon, the sun must rise a bit further to be visible over the mountains in the distance. This provides a nice cushion— especially if you’re trying to catch the sunrise over the summer.
Navajo loop
The Navajo Loop and Queen’s Garden Trail is the most popular trail in the park, but for good reason. The expansive scenery will leave you at a loss of words, while the towering canyon walls are staggeringly tall in a way that truly puts the magnitude of Bryce Canyon into perspective. The trail brings you down into the amphitheater, allowing you to experience the stacks of hoodoos up close! This trail is about 3 miles long… getting down to the hoodoos means there’s an ascent to return to the trailhead; however, it’s pretty manageable with an overall elevation of about 650 ft.
photo via nps.gov
Fairyland Loop
The Navajo loop is an awesome hike… the only downside it the popularity can make it a bit crowded. If you have the stamina for an 8 mile hike with a little over 1,500 ft of elevation gain, the Fairyland Loop is the hike for you!! You still get to be up close with the spectacular scenery and take in jaw-dropping views, but with a bit more solitude than you might find elsewhere.
photo via nps.gov
Grab a Bite
All that wandering around will work up an appetite! There’s a few different options when you’re looking to hunt down some sustenance in the park. Breakfast, lunch, and dinner are served in the The Bryce Canyon Lodge Restaurant (menus here) Right next door you’ll find the Valhalla Pizzeria and Coffee Shop, which is also open all day but they only serve pizza after 11:30am. The Bryce Canyon Lodge also houses The General Store, if you’re looking for some quick grab-n-go options or snacks!
Rainbow and Yovimpa Viewpoints
There are so many fantastic viewpoints that allow one to admire Bryce Canyon in its entirety. Rainbow Point and Yovimpa Point are at the very southern end of the park, giving way to the Grand Staircase and an array of truly remarkable cliffs, making it a delightful crow’s nest for observation. This actually the highest point in the park!
photo via nps.gov
Sunset
While there is both a Sunrise Point and a Sunset Point, only the sunrise is truly visible in the park. At sunset, the fading sun creates an ethereal watercolor painting in the sky, which is certainly beautiful in its own right, but the sun sinking into the horizon is not visible from Sunset Point. Regardless, it’s a beautiful and peaceful way to end the day.
While sunrise and sunset are generally known to be beautiful times of day, this is especially true at Bryce Canyon. The sunrise in particular, is outstanding… the way the sun reflects across the hoodoos and spires makes it beyond worth-it to go out of your way to witness this kaleidoscope of color. We hope this helps you plan your own perfect day in Bryce Canyon.
Zion is one of five national parks in Utah. Be sure to check out Zion, Arches, Capitol Reef, and Canyonlands as well, to truly appreciate all of the Utah national park topography! Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
Los Cabos, Mexico is the perfect location for stunning beaches, rich culture, amazing food, and memorable adventures. Whether you’re keen on the relaxing, upscale charm of San Jose or the luxe nightlife of San Lucas, there’s something for everyone at this lively tip of the Baja Peninsula. Look no further for your next enticing yet blissfully relaxing one week trip.
From landing to take off, we’ve got your itinerary all mapped out. You’ll find an array of culinary delights, enticing exploration, and dreamy relaxation on this peninsula paradise. The perfect backdrop to your next vacation beckons!
DAY ONE
With any luck, your flight will arrive with some daylight left to burn. There are a few options to get to your hotel from the airport. You can take a taxi, an uber, or a private driver. The latter came recommended, so that was the option we opted for.
It’s about a 45 minute drive from the Los Cabos Airport to Cabo San Lucas. We landed at our Airbnb, which we highly recommend! The location was amazing– downtown is close (but far enough away the party scene won’t keep you up at night), plus you can see The Arch from the balcony and a most amazing view of the sunset. After checking in, head to the downtown area to wander around the various shops and restaurants. We popped into the Cabo Coffee Company, which became a staple coffee fix throughout the trip.
On our way back to the Airbnb, we stopped by a grocery store as our rental had a full kitchen, which makes meals rather convenient. Upon our arrival we unloaded our grocery finds and went to lay by the pool for a bit. Opting for a simple dinner, we ate on the balcony and watched the sunset. It was the perfect end to our first day.
note: the two photographs of our San Juan Airbnb were sampled from their listing
DAY TWO
The main event on the schedule for today: a sailing excursion! The five hours we spent on the catamaran flew by in a breeze of breathtaking beauty. We sailed off the shores of Cabo San Lucas, where the Pacific Ocean meets the Sea of Cortez. Our excursion led us to the distinctive rock formations, colloquially dubbed Land’s End– the most illustrious being ‘El Arco’, which translates to ‘The Arch’.
We were granted glimpses of the migrating whales as well as a plethora of sea lions. For anyone on the boat feeling adventurous, paddle-boards and snorkel sets were available for aquatic exploration. If you’re less thrill-seeking and more keen on relaxation, the unlimited open bar and bevvy of hor’s d’ oeuvres (shrimp, chips & guac, ceviche, salad, pasta salad, etc) will guarantee you enjoy your time. We truly could not recommend Cabo Adventures more highly!
A massage is always a good idea, but a massage on vacation is somehow extra relaxing. The Airbnb host had a wealth of local knowledge and recommended a fantastic masseuse for in-home treatments. Feeling deliciously relaxed, our day ended with another delicious homemade dinner, shared together on the balcony as the sun set on another wonderful day in paradise.
DAY THREE
Nothing kicks the day off quite like catching a glimpse of some migrating humpback whales, from our balcony. Seeing these gentle giants had us ready to pack our bags and head to the coast. The primary agenda for day three? Big chillin’ on at Chileno Beach! This public access beach About 15 minutes outside Cabo San Lucas, and is impressive for a few reasons. First and foremost, there are bathrooms and showers available to beachgoers that aren’t grungy. Another plus? This beach is also known to be a good spot for snorkeling! It’s always fun to see the beautiful landscape under the sea in vibrant color!
While Chileno Beach isn’t in the heart of Cabo San Lucas, this itself can actually be a perk. You won’t find nearly as many vendors at this beach as you would at say Medano Beach. This isn’t always a make or break factor (and it’s hard to begrudge individuals trying to make a living), but in busier seasons the beach can be far less relaxing when you’re turning down sales pitches left and right with a kind “no gracias”.
We closed out the day with dinner at Pietro’s Restaurant and Pizza. This tasty Italian spot is not only a nice change of pace from some of the Mexican cuisine– it’s really quite delicious, with a fun ambiance.
DAY FOUR
After a day on the beach it’s time to tear it up in the desert! We went ATVing with Real Baja Tours and had the most exhilarating time!! Not having ridden ATVs much in the past, it was thrilling to fly across the desert.
Afterwards, we grabbed food at Outpost (honest opinion: not bad, but kinda underwhelmed) before heading back to our airbnb. After our late lunch, we hung out by the pool until sunset. There’s no bad sunsets in Cabo!
DAY FIVE
Our last day in San Lucas started at The Cabo Coffee Company for some top notch bean juice to get the day going. From there we bid our airbnb adieu and headed up to the Cabo Azul Resort in San Jose.
Upon arriving, we grabbed lunch at the restaurant by the pool, and let me just say… the views from a high rise are lovely, but hearing the waves crash as you enjoy lunch brings relaxation to a whole new level. After lunch, we went on a long walk down the beach, and felt so at peace taking in the gorgeous coastline.
For dinner, we tried to hunt down a slightly more authentic restaurant for dinner at El Toro Guero. There were far too many gringas for it to be considered a ‘local’ restaurant, but the food was excellent! Would recommend!
DAY SIX
The last full day in paradise means taking in as many ocean views as possible. The resort had various cabanas available to guests, and we managed to snag one on the beach. Oftentimes these more private reclining options have an additional cost associated with their use, but we were pleased to discover all cabanas— both beachside and poolside— were complimentary to guests. We spent the morning sunning along the shore, attempting to imprint the coastline in our memories.
Downtown Cabo San Juan was only a mile and a half walk from Cabo Azul, so after a morning of divine ocean views, we put on our sandals and made our way towards the plaza. The quaint area was certainly worth the walk with so many shops and restaurants to wander into. The aura of old-town charm is alluring any day of the week, but it’s especially worth exploring on a Thursday to take in all there is to see along the Art Walk. Perhaps a little touristy, but worth visiting nonetheless.
For dinner we popped across the street as there’s a wide array of restaurants to choose from. We found ourselves at Latino 8, and were beyond delighted. Everything was amazing… food, service, ambiance were all divine!
DAY SEVEN
Not wanting to stray too far from the resort, we spent our final morning by the pool– leaving only to take one last walk on the beach. A final virgin strawberry daiquiri from the swim-up bar was a must, followed by some tasty pool-side nachos. All too soon it was time to head back to the airport, so we begrudgingly packed up our bags and checked out. We used the same private driver to take us all back to the airport, and had another lovely experience.
PARTING THOUGHTS
Cabo offers the perfect vacation for everyone. We were pretty keen on having a low-key, relaxing vacation, so our beach and pool-side days with stunning views were exactly what we wanted. For those looking for more adventure, there’s enough desert, beach, and ocean to keep anyone entertained. If you want to cut loose and indulge in night life, there is abundant opportunity for that as well. Truly a vacation spot for any and all to enjoy!
While we always encourage anyone traveling to a forgein country to make an attempt to know some of the local language, Cabo is pretty touristy, so most people you converse with will be able to speak English.
Just a heads up, many snorkel spots in Mexico aren’t quite as vibrant as they once were, due to dying coral. Reef safe sunscreen is everywhere nowadays, so be sure to add that to your packing list before you go!
written by McKenna
If you look up diva in the dictionary, you will find a picture of McKenna Lee. Loud-mouthed and overly opinionated she may have the biggest personality (read: attitude) of us all. McKenna is in college at FSU, but her passion lies in her small business Mack Swimwear and running her small group through church. She lives for days spent in a bathing suit, and tries to go surfing in every new beach town she visits.
A mission trip can be an amazing way to immerse oneself in a new community while concurrently working respectfully to better the place you’re adventuring to. It is a uniquely human experience to humble yourself through acts of service and learn how to love others well– and witness how that changes across different cultures. Recently, I joined House of Ride Nature on a trip down to Costa Rica and had the most amazing time seeing how God works through us to make a difference in the lives of one another. It was an awesome reminder that purposeful travel is so much more meaningful and grounding than an overtly touristy trip.
DAY ONE
We arrived early afternoon into the Liberia airport, and headed to the nearby Walmart to pick up some supplies and grab some lunch. Our original housing arrangement fell through, but luckily we were able to stay at Youth With A Mission or YWAM’s Costa Rican base. Part of YWAM’s local ministry is to host skate competitions at local skateparks. During these competitions, they give out prizes and connect with skaters while sharing the Gospel.
After getting ourselves settled at the YWAM base, we headed over to the skate park to skate and interact with some of the local youth. As we were in a less touristy area, being fluent in Spanish was quite helpful as I did not require a translator to interact with everyone. After we’d skated and spent a few hours at the skatepark, we headed back to the YWAM base to grab some dinner. I enjoyed the first of many casados (a traditional Costa Rican plate) I ate during this trip.
YWAM Liberia base
DAY TWO
Nothing says ‘act of service’ like a little bit of manual labor and a lot of elbow grease. Our first morning in Costa Rica we wanted to thank the YWAM base family for graciously housing us rather last-minute, so after our morning quiet time, we spent the morning working on some cleaning projects. When we were done we went out and played soccer with the kids for a bit before grabbing some lunch.
Our afternoon was fully devoted to preparing for and subsequently running the skate competition taking place that afternoon. We compiled prizes and made food, and directed competitors as they began to arrive. It was such a powerful environment to feel the thrill of excitement in conjunction with the power of the Holy Spirit working through our small conversations and encouragement. Our evening was filled with skating festivities, and we were all rather pooped by the end of the night.
DAY THREE
On our third day, we started with individual quiet time, and then packed up and hit the road for Tamarindo. Along the way, we made a stop at the Feeding Center in Brasilito. The Feeding Center is an outreach program through the Casa Vida church, in which about 40 children from the El Llanito school come to receive meals every day. Volunteers are needed from 10:30am-12:30am each day to provide the meals, so we made it just in time to start putting our hands to work.
Once we’d wrapped up at the Feeding Center, we finished the drive to Tamarindo and went and checked into our hotel: Las Tortugas. This hotel truly has accommodations for all kinds of travels. They have eleven unique hotel rooms, with different styles and occupancies to accommodate groups of various sizes. If you’re looking for something a little more secluded, they offer a beachfront bungalow as well.
In addition to their hotel room options, they also have the Ranchos, which they refer to as their student housing as the rooms are small and rather modest. As we were not in Costa Rica for a luxury vacation, this was the option we utilized. Even as this was their budget/hostel-esque accommodation, each room had AC (really lovely as AC is not always a guarantee in CR) and private bathrooms. It was perfect for what we needed!
For dinner, we had the first of many meals at Sodas Las Tunas. A ‘soda’ is a small mom and pop style, open air restaurant that serves traditional Costa Rican food. A casado is one of these traditional plates. It typically includes a protein (chicken, steak, pork, fish), rice, black beans, a small salad, and a couple of plantains. The pork casado was my favorite dish at Sodas Las Tunas!
DAY FOUR
Our fourth day in Costa Rica started with a visit to Deli Cafe. This coffee shop will get you caffeinated for your day, but they also have quite the assortment of baked goods and sandwiches as well.
After breakfast, we headed back over to the Feeding Center we had visited the day prior to help distribute meals. After everyone was served, we took the opportunity to give the kitchen a much-needed deep cleaning. Once the kitchen was sparkling, we got to work in the back of the property clearing out an area to put a garden in. The goal is for the Feeding Center to become a self-sustainable garden, where the fruits, vegetables, and starches produced go straight to the meals prepared for the children. By the end of the day, we had prepared small plot for seeding!
On our way back to the hotel we stopped by Donde Adrian Frutas & Verduras for some clean and refreshing snacks. We made it back in time to watch the sunset on the beach behind the hotel. We went to Sodas Las Tunas again for dinner, but added a stop at a convenience store right up the street from Las Tunas for some ice cream.
DAY FIVE
Our fifth day started unusually early as anyone keen on surfing woke up before the sun to go surfing at dawn. I LOVE surfing and try to get in the water with a board in any new beach town I visit, so this was an incredibly special experience for me. A truly beautiful way to start the day. From there, our early morning start to the day afforded up the opportunity to go surfing and still make it down to the Feeding Center in time to serve meals at 10:30am.
Once everyone’s belly was full, we headed to the Tamarindo Skate Park. We were able to have some fun skating, while chatting with newfound local friends, informing them of the upcoming skate competition being hosted. At some point in the afternoon we wandered over to the nearby cafe Breaking Bread, to take a break and enjoy a (very) tasty treat. At the end of the day, I bet you can guess where we had dinner?? A delicious pork casado from Sodas Las Tunas hit the spot after our long-but-lovely day.
DAY SIX
Our sixth day was all about local exploration. We started the day with a canoeing and kayaking tour on the Estero de Playa Grande River, booked through our hotel. Having worked up an appetite, we made back to back snack stops for a tapas-esque lunch. Our first stop was at Pots and Bowls. In addition to having a mouth-watering array of both sweet and savory bowls, they also have loads of drink options as well, from cold pressed juices to smoothies to tea and coffee. Our next snack stop brought us to Podoka– an AMAZING Brazilian bakery, with so many delicious sweet treats.
Once we were all fueled up, we headed to Guanacaste Forest Zipline for some afternoon zip lining. While zip-lining was fun, we wouldn’t necessarily recommend the company we used. Zip lining is an amazing adrenaline rush, but alas if we were to do it over again, we’d go through someone else.
You can’t beat the classics! We had another awesome dinner at Sodas Las Tunas, before we turned in for the evening– tuckered out from our long day of adventures.
DAY SEVEN
Our seventh day was our last full day in Costa Rica, and you better believe we made the most of it. In the morning, we ran a surf camp on the beach behind our hotel, as this area of the beach is actually known to be a good surf spot. Having surfed for years, it makes my heart happy to share a hobby I love with new friends.
Yesterday’s tapas-style lunch was a fun way to mix and match between the ten of us. We went back to Pots & Bowls and also swung by Little Lucha for some street tacos that disappeared like magic. Afterwards, we headed to The Bowl to host our final skate competition.
Not only was it an amazingly fun time, but one of the guys we met earlier in the day ended up coming out that night. He walked/hitchhiked 20km to get there and crushed the skate competition. At the end of the night, when we were wrapping things up, he made the decision to he give his life to Christ. It was such a compelling moment, and an awesome way to end a truly powerful day.
DAY EIGHT
It’s amazing how fast a week can fly by. Our final day we ate breakfast at our hotel and then went to church at Casa Vida. While I can speak Spanish, not everyone in our group was quite so bilingual, so we really loved being able to attend Casa Vida’s shared worship service, where they sang in both English and Spanish. Due to the large population of ex-pats in Tamarindo, the church here has graciously created a worship environment to feel like home to everyone. The melting pot of cultures and languages in one church body was a beautiful testament to the very simple understanding that we are all God’s children.
Once church was over, we packed up the car and made the drive from Tamarindo back to Liberia. From there, we hopped on the plane and had a smooth journey home, reflecting on the amazing time we’d had.
The Scoop on Ride Nature
Does it seem like we did more surfing and skateboarding than you might expect for a mission trip? This is 100% part of Ride Nature’s ethos and vision.
“That children worldwide would have access to boards and the opportunity to surf and skate.
That we would reach every individual in the action sports industry with the good news of Jesus Christ and provide them the opportunity to see, hear, and respond to the gospel.
That action sports leaders are multiplied, equipped and resourced to represent the gospel to the ends of the earth.”
Ride Nature Vision Statement
As such, the time we spent putting on skating and surfing competitions was just as valuable as the time spent serving food or cleaning. Never having been on a mission trip quite like this before, it was a unique way to holistically embrace a new culture, while concurrently sharing the Gospel in a meaningful way. If you want to learn more about Ride Nature or other upcoming mission trips they have, you can do so here. Whether you’re planning to head down for a mission trip or a vacation adventure, check out our Nine Helpful Costa Rican Travel FAQs before your next Costa Rica adventure.
Peace and Blessings
When I was in middle school, I started going on mission trips to a children’s center in Guatemala, and it opened my eyes in so many ways. One such takeaway was the profound impact you can have in others lives as well as your own when you humble yourself in acts of service. In the years since, I returned to that children’s center multiple times as well as involving myself in a handful of local ministries.
My faith has always been a huge part of my life; however, since going off to college I began using my time between semesters so adventure to new places and visit friends. As such I had not been on a mission trip for a few years before I embarked on this recent adventure. God works in powerful ways, and it was such a reinvigorating experience to open myself up to Christ in a new way, in a new place.
Mission work comes in all shapes and sizes and is always necessary in your own home community; however, there’s beauty to traveling with the primary intention being to serve others. Please reach out if you have any questions or are unsure where to start if this is something you’re interested in!
written by McKenna
If you look up diva in the dictionary, you will find a picture of McKenna Lee. Loud-mouthed and overly opinionated she may have the biggest personality (read: attitude) of us all. McKenna is in college at FGCU, but her passion lies in her small business Mack Swimwear and running her small group through church. She lives for days spent in a bathing suit, and tries to go surfing in every new beach town she visits.
Sometimes you just need to get out of town. While longer vacations are certainly the best way to fully explore an area, it’s possible to explore someplace new without burning through all your PTO. Whether it’s a girls trip, solo exploration, or a weekend away with your honey, a long weekend can be the perfect excuse to explore someplace new. From action-packed to soothing relaxing, check out these twelve weekend getaways, and start planning your next escape!
Charleston, SC
Whether you’re a history buff, an outdoor enthusiast, or a discerning foodie, Charleston maintains an appeal for a wide breadth of visitors. A town big enough to have an enviable dining and drinking scene, but so quaint in its roots, it still maintains its idyllic beach charm. A perfect weekend destination to enjoy outdoor relaxation.
photos by Luke Higgs via www.charlestoncvb.com
San Antonio, TX
Everything is bigger in Texas! If you’ve never been to the rodeo, this is your chance… from bull-riding to mutton-bustin’, the rodeo is a wild time. If you’re looking for a more relaxing experience, the Riverwalk makes for a gorgeous meandering exploration– with endless options enticing restaurants and bars to stop in. If you visit during the holiday season, the Riverwalk is decorated with twinkle lights, making it rather dreamy as the sun goes down. Can’t forget, San Antonio is also home of The Alamo!
Minneapolis, MN
The best time to visit Minneapolis? The fall! Within an hour’s drive from the city, you can find a myriad of scenic drives to take in the gorgeous fall foliage as it transitions to a bold array of oranges, yellows, and reds. If you enjoy hiking, the options are plentiful here with beautiful bluffs overlooking the driftless region. Apple orchards also make for charming adventures. Nothing’s delicious like a freshly picked apple!
New Orleans
New Orleans is unique with its unexpected combination of bohemian charm and old-world architecture. As the crown jewel of New Orleans, the French quarter beckons with intrigue for visitors of all ages. Whether you’re keen on enjoying beignets or Bourbon Street, you won’t leave disappointed. For football fans, a fall visit means you may be able to catch a Saints game at the Superdome!
photo from www.mardigrasneworleans.com
San Francisco, CA
Home of the iconic Golden Gate Bridge, San Francisco has no shortage of explorations to fill a weekend. The ever-touristy but alluring Fisherman’s Wharf has something for everyone with amusement park-style rides, a chocolate lover’s paradise, and sunning sea lions. As you continue to wander, you may happen upon Chinatown and Little Italy… they’ll have you convinced you’re not in California any more.
Savannah, GA
Savannah is a delightful intersection of old-fashioned southern charm and modern, chic-yet- grassroots style. Rich in culture, this area is teeming with moving artwork and influential architecture. The cobblestone lined River Street and it’s array of vendors are iconic, but the delicious food and craft breweries continue to impress even as you wander away from the main drag. A long weekend is the perfect amount of time to take in this historic city.
Las Vegas, NV
While Las Vegas is known for its nightlife and gambling, there is so much more to do here than just drink the weekend away poolside (nothing wrong with that, if that’s the vibe you’re after though!). Hot air balloon tours over the desert are an almost surreal experience. Another nearby adventure, Zion National Park is just under three hours away, but this breathtaking show of nature is worth the drive. An escape to this pocket of the southwest will be far from boring, no matter what you are looking to do.
photo from www.lvcva.com
Nashville, TN
If live music feeds your soul, the pandemic must have been a rough drought. With live music at nearly every bar in Nashville, your heart will be happy once more. While Nashville is known for its music and bar scene, being located in ‘the south’ guarantees a wide array of options for good eats as well. If you’re looking to mix things up with a weekend of rock and roll, Nashville is just the spot.
Park City, UT
If you’re looking for a winter weekend adventure to make the most of winter sports, pack your warm layers and head to Park City, Utah. While you might expect downhill skiing and snowboarding, you can also give dog sledding, cross-country skiing, snowmobiling, and snowshoeing a try as well.
photo from www.visitparkcity.com
Ashville, NC
If Nashville doesn’t exactly sound like your idea for a relaxing weekend getaway, Asheville might be just what you’re looking for. A little more peace an quiet to take in nature’s scenery, with loads of hikes to explore. Some will even lead you to waterfalls… or perhaps a 60-foot natural waterslide. Looking to do some house hunting? Touring the Biltmore Estate will have you re-imaging your dream house. After a full day of exploration, the brewery and live music scene in Asheville will keep you feeling groovy all night. Asheville has some unique Airbnb and VRBO stays as well… check out all the fun tree-houses you could spend the night in!
photo from www.exploreasheville.com
Portland, OR
Do the outdoors make you feel alive? Visiting Portland for the weekend means you have the big city life available to you if you so desire, but practically every kind of outdoor adventure you could hope to find is within a two hour drive. The coast? An easy hour and a half drive west. Driving the same length to the east will bring you to Mt. Hood for endless winter fun. The Columbia River Gorge is less than an hour outside the city, and it’s a gorgeous place to go hiking. Portland is a perfect city to visit if you want to spend a weekend filled with new hikes.
Miami, FL
If your ideal mid-winter weekend escape is somewhere warm, head to Miami. With your toes in the sand, this beach city will have you forgetting all about the freezing temps at home. Not only does Miami deliver beach views in spades, but the cultural cornucopia guarantees a wide array of cuisines to satisfy your palette. It goes without saying there’s also loads of shopping to be done. A weekend in Miami is many things, but boring is never one of them.
A long weekend spent exploring is an invigorating way to get out of the usual bump and grind. Many of these alluring cities have moderate to large airports that help keep flight prices low. There’s someplace exciting to adventure any time of year!
All photographs contained in this blog post were taken by the sisters of Five Wandering Soles, unless otherwise noted.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
When visiting Kauai, there are endless options of places to stay. Planning to splurge for vacation? You will be hard-pressed to find a better resort than the Grand Hyatt Kauai. Immediately upon arrival, we were met with warm, genuine customer service and stellar views of both the resort and the coastline. Throughout our stay here, we savored everything they had to offer: from delicious food to poolside relaxation to refreshing spa treatments. The Grand Hyatt is a luxurious reflection of Kauai’s essence. Our detailed review will help you decide if this is the resort experience you’re looking for.
For some, planning a trip can be a headache, while for others it’s a delight to pour over all the options and craft the perfect itinerary. If you’re considering staying at the Grand Hyatt Kauai, we’ve comprehensively outlined all the amenities, facilities, and dining options, as well as things to consider before booking.
A Warm Welcome
The immediate bellhop service, a beautiful orchid lei, and outstanding customer service at check-in are all awaiting you upon arrival at the Grand Hyatt Kauai. Due to a change in flight, we ended up arriving a couple hours earlier than anticipated, so our room wasn’t quite ready yet. The front desk staff stored our bags, comped us each an appetizer and drink, and invited us to explore the property while we waited for our room. Once it was ready, a bottle of champagne and chilled glasses inside were a sweet surprise. All in all, a 10/10 first impression.
Complementary Resort Activities
The resort offers a handful of complementary activities. If you have even been intrigued by lei making, learning to play the ukulele, or secretly wanting to learn hula, all you have to do is reserve a spot through the concierge desk. If you’re more in the mood to experience rather than learn a new skill, you can participate in Koi fish feeding, a parrot talk, or wander with the hydroponic garden tour. Check out the schedule to see which activities are offered which days!
Concierge
Some people thrive on the excitement of planning their vacation and others just want someone else to handle the details. If you fall in the latter category, the concierge knows how to take care of you. Blue Hawaiian Activities can organize air tours, snorkeling, sunset cruises, surfing, fishing, and so more. The amenities of the resort can make it feel difficult to leave, but endless adventure beckon on Kauai. You are certain to miss out if you don’t go exploring.
Anara Spa
Looking to treat yourself at the Anara Spa? Your options are endless! They offer massages, facials, body polishes, and float therapy. There’s also a full service salon, offering manicures, pedicures, hair and makeup styling. Not only does your treatment include services rendered, but any 50 minute treatment also grants the recipient use of the Anara Spa facilities. This includes a lap pool, locker areas, showers, a sauna, and a steam room. They are the largest spa on the island, so you won’t find a better set-up anywhere else!
Fitness
The gym is located in the Anara Spa, and it’s open to guests 24/7. The two-room open set up features a room of cardio equipment (including two Peloton bikes) and a room of free weights, machines, and a squat rack. Additionally, daily fitness classes are offered, from Zumba to Pilates Yoga Fusion to Cardio Burn and so many more.
If you’re more interested in lifestyle fitness, from 6am to 7pm, bikes are available for guests to use for local exploration. For up to three hours, you can adventure around with the wind in your hair on one of their cool blue bikes.
If hiking is more your speed, the Maha’ulepu Heritage Trail starts right by the Grand Hyatt and is a relatively flat, easy 4-mile hike. Check it out for beautiful views of the coastline. Looking to stay on the paved, beaten path? Stop by the front desk at the Anara Spa, where they have maps of local running and walking paths.
Poipu Bay Golf
A complimentary shuttle will bring you to the prestigious Poipu Bay Golf Course. This 210 acre property stretches along a rugged coastline featuring 85 bunkers and five water hazards. Distractions abound with humpback whales breaching in the distance and countless tropical plants acting as an inspired backdrop. Due to its oceanfront location trade winds can vary suddenly, making this a most intriguing golfing experience.
Dining
The food you eat can make or break your vacation adventure as food is a unique way to appreciate a new culture. The dining options available are perfectly curated to maximize the guest’s experience. From casual poolside dining to a romantic, upscale dinner, the Grand Hyatt delivers.
Tidepools
The romantic thatched-roof bungalows stand above the lagoon, teeming with colorful koi fish. This dreamy date-night spot features a locally sourced menu, heavily influenced by modern Hawaiian cuisine. A local tour guide mentioned it was known for being an awesome dinner spot, even outside of resort guest clientele. Reservations are recommended to ensure you can snag a table here.
Stevenson’s Library
Whether you’re seated at the gorgeous koa wood bar or outside in the open-air lanai, the ambiance exudes an air of cultivated relaxation, with sweeping ocean views. The fresh sushi alone is worth going stopping by for. If you’re in the mood for a drink, dive into their chapter book of inventive martinis, tropical cocktails, and both classic and creative whiskey drinks. They also have sake, beer, and wine… something for everyone!
Just a heads up, if you know you want to check this spot out, make a reservation. If you make a last minute decision to head there for dinner, make sure you arrive early as it’s not uncommon for there to be a line 5-10 parties deep waiting for the doors to open.
Hale Nalu
Conveniently located poolside, this vintage surf shack has quite the selection: burgers, poke bowls, salads, and more. Anything you might want after frolicking around in the ocean or pool for hours! We were big fans of both the food and drink menu. Kalua Pork Nachos makes the perfect afternoon snack, and the Mango Green Dream cocktail will have you swearing there’s no way your health smoothie could possibly have rum in it!
Captain’s Bar
An outdoor, open air bar area, right next to the adult pool is the ideal spot to catch the football game, with a cold cocktail (or beer) in hand. From its perch on the upper deck, you have a prime view to take in all the pools and lagoons below as well as the sparkling ocean. Besides the beers on tap, the menu offered here is the same as that at Hale Nalu.
Ilima Terrace
We actually snagged breakfast at the Grand Club every morning, but we heard awesome things about the amazing, fresh breakfast options at Ilima Terrace. It also never hurts to start the day with spectacular views.
Seaview Terrace
The Seaview Terrace is open for breakfast as well as dinner, making it an easy spot to swing by at almost any point in the day. While the food is certainly tasty (the skewers were surprisingly small but quite delicious), the nightly live music is what sets this spot apart. They have a different group there every night, keeping it interesting for guests with a keen ear for groovy tunes.
Share the Stars
Celebrating something special? You can indulge in an exclusive five-course beachside dining experience under the starry Hawaiian sky. The waves will be your only company as the moon rises over the cliffs. This romantic candlelight dinner is guaranteed to be an unforgettable date.
Luau
The Grand Hyatt Kauai hosts luaus on Wednesday and Saturday from 5:30-8pm. The price of admission includes an all you can eat buffet, an open bar, and cultural entertainment. You can check out the full menu here (oh yeah, there’s Ahi poke Imu, Style Kalua Pig, and so much more). The show they put on tells the story of a fantastic journey through the rich cultural history of the Hawaiian people. What better way to discover the stories of Hawaii and its people than through ancestral music and dance. Are you sold yet? You can check it out more here.
Pool
From fun to relaxation, the pool deck shows out. A saltwater lagoon with its own sandy shoreline? It’s like relaxing in the ocean, without worrying about being swept away. Need a moment away from the kids? The adult pool on the upper deck is free of splashing cannon balls. Or perhaps you’re in the mood to float down the lazy river. The slide is fun for children and adults alike, winding an exciting 150 feet before shooting you into the lower deck pool. Taking an evening dip? There’s not one but two jacuzzis to relax in while you look up at the stars.
The ambiance is perfect for couples as well as families. Adults and kids alike had a blast on the slide, but anyone looking for a child-free zone could relax by the adults only pool. So much fun for families, but also quite enjoyable for a honeymooning couple.
Cabanas
A cozy slice of privacy along the pool or beach, there are six different cabana styles to choose from. Ranging from $150 to $1,000, these cabanas are perfect for anyone looking for a shaded home base for the day. If you’re interested in snagging one of these luxe cabanas, be sure to do so in advance to ensure availability. You can explore all six options here.
It’s worth noting while the cabanas are beyond lovely to have, there are loads of shaded lounge chairs, hammocks, and swings throughout the property, so a cabana is not your only option if you’re hoping to escape the sun a bit.
Departure Lounge
Included in the resort fee is use of the departure lounge. If you have a late morning or early afternoon check-out time, but an evening flight out, the departure lounge is a wonderful amenity to help make the most of your last day. Hoping to fit in one last hike? There are showers available to ensure everyone is nice and clean for take off.
Room With a View
Salvador’s had his Hyatt card for years and was rather pleased when he made it to the Explorist tier of membership last year. Explorists receive an upgrade to the best room available (excluding suites), which is how we found ourselves on the six floor, with a fantastic view of both the resort and the ocean.
In summary, the room was a nice size for us to spread out in during our time there. The bed was fantastically comfy, the bathroom was more than spacious, and the toilet was equipped with a bidets. Between the resort and the adventures that await outside the property, we did not spend much time in our room, but the time we were there, it was lovely and fit our needs perfectly.
As would be expected the resort offers daily housekeeping services; however, in the spirit of conservation, guests that elect to omit their housekeeping for the day may receive either a $10 dining credit or 500 points credited to their World of Hyatt account.
Any Cons?
We truly had a lovely time, and I have recommended this resort to friends and family, that too, have only had lovely things to say. Any negatives are pretty mild in nature. The resort is pretty spread out, so if you struggle with mobility impairments this could be a potential frustration; however, as fit, active young adults, we didn’t feel the walking required was excessive.
If you are looking for children-free resort, this is not it. One of the pools has signs up stating it’s adult only, and this was largely respected, but there were kids that would unknowingly come play in there before eventually moving on. Couples and honeymooners, don’t take this to mean it’s an environment catered to entertaining children. We enjoyed the Grand Hyatt Kauai as a couple and found it to be perfectly relaxing; however, if you’re looking for an environment completely devoid of children, it will not be here. Inversely, for families, this would certainly be a resort the whole crew would enjoy. We saw ‘kids’ of all ages going down the slide and floating along the lazy river.
The Best For Last
The best part about our stay here? It was completely free. We booked our room with points through Salvador’s World of Hyatt account, for a very reasonable 25k points per night. The Chase points we transferred are usually valued around 1.8 cents/point. At this conversion, the 25k point room cost us about $450 in “points”. That may seem like a hefty nightly cost, but a night at this resort usually goes for $600-$1000 per night. If you have Hyatt points to spend, this an excellent category 6 hotel to cash your points in on. New to the points game and curious how to score this room ASAP? Check out our blog post on making the most of your Hyatt points.
The 30-Second Skinny
Overall, we felt the Grand Hyatt Kauai was a lovely place to stay. The very nature of Kauai resort accommodations can be spendy, but the resort maintains beautiful facilities, excellent customer service, and endless opportunities for relaxation— providing a good value for money (or points) spent. Outside of the larger amenities detailed above, the resort also offered complimentary use of washers and dryers, samples of sunscreen, and a bottle of champagne upon arrival as a nod to our celebration. The small, thoughtful amenities go a long way to make a place stand out. There were no drawbacks to our time here, and we confidently recommend staying here throughout your Kauai vacation adventure.
While the Grand Hyatt is hard to leave, Kauai has too many gorgeous views and enticing adventures to spend your whole trip pool-side. While it’s not a large island, nature shows off in a big way here. If you’re looking to make the most of your time on Kauai, check out our action packed four-day itinerary.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Kauai is known for being home to one of the most beautiful and recognizable coastlines in the world: the Nāpali Coast. It’s a breathtaking combination of rugged cliffs and steep valleys that abruptly drop off into the ocean. The grandeur of the topography is memorable in and of itself, but what really makes the Nāpali Coast dazzling is the palette of glittering greens and blues, in stark contrast to the neutrals of the underlying foundation. From a day hike to a multi-night backpacking trip, this choose-your-own-adventure trail should be at the top of your to-do list when visiting Kauai.
While going on a hike seems simple enough, you would find some unforeseen obstacles if you’d hoped to just show up the day-of. Below we’ve detailed everything you need to know to ensure you actually make it on the Kalalau Trail. Cheers to enjoying this beautiful gem of Kauai!
Two of us have made our way to Kauai and hiked the Kalalau trail— one visit in October and one in January. Hard to say which time of year is better, because this hike is as memorable as it is breathtaking, practically any time of year!
Walk It Out
Kauai does not have a road that circles the perimeter of the island as they were unable to carve out a path through this beautiful but tenuous coastline. As a matter of fact, one of the only way through the Nāpali Coastline by land is via the Kalalau Trail. This trail is a 22-mile round trip hiking adventure, not designed for the faint of heart. The trail crosses through five valleys before ending in the Kalalau Valley. Experienced backpackers will tackle the trail in its entirety, but visitors looking to explore a more palatable 4-mile hike to Hanakapi’ai Beach make the trek in spades every day.
Reservations
The Kalalau Trail extends predominantly through the Nāpali Coast State Wilderness Park; however, the trail starts in Hāʻena State Park. Both Hāʻena State Park (HSP) and the Nāpali Coast State Wilderness Park (NCSWP) were closed for over a year from 2018- 2019 due to severe flooding throughout the north shore of Kauaʻi. Upon reopening the parks, the quantity of visitors permitted each day was limited.
In order to gain admission to the parks, advanced reservation is required. For most, that means making a HSP Entry Reservation. Hikers with this reservation are granted access as far as the Hanakapi’ai Valley. If you plan to hike farther or do any camping, you must acquire a NCSWP camping permit. This will grant you admission into the park as well as the right to camp in authorized areas, for up to five days.
Reservations for both HSP entry and NCSWP camping become available at midnight 30 days prior. These reservations go extremely quickly. With a 4-hour time difference between Hawaii and Wisconsin, we assumed we could wake up at 6am and book our reservation without issue. By 2am (HAST) all the ‘parking + entry’ passes had been sold out. We had flexibility in our trip, and were able to wake up and secure the passes the following morning; however, we were shocked at just how fast the passes went.
What’s a Gal to Do
Your HSP entry reservation will provide access to Ke’e Beach, which requires no hiking to reach. There’s a short (< ½ mile) walk from the parking lot to the beach, but this is easily reached by anyone without profound mobility impairments. Along the Kalalau trail, you will be permitted as far as the Hanakāpīʻai valley, but even with this boundary, there’s still a couple spots to adventure to. Most popular, the hike to Hanakāpīʻai Beach is 4-miles round trip. You can also make the longer trek to Hanakāpīʻai Falls, which is a longer 8-mile round trip adventure. Due to time constraints we just hiked to the beach and felt we saw a gorgeous slice of the coast.
Tips & Recommendations
Tip #1
When you’re making your reservation, the ‘parking + entry’ is going to be the preferential option for most people; however, the shuttle + entry is a good back-up option. It will require a bit more planning and flexibility, but at the end of the day still affords the same adventure experience.
Tip #2
If you already own hiking poles and you have room whilst packing, you won’t regret bringing them with you. If you don’t, there’s a collection of 30-40 walking sticks that people borrow and return to the trailhead. The nature of the trail is quite muddy, so even if you consider yourself to be above-averagely fit, I would recommend grabbing a walking stick.
Tip #3
Right before you reach Hanakāpīʻai Beach, there’s a small stream that must be crossed. When we were there, it was possible for bold hikers to hop across a handful of rocks to cross without soaked shoes (actually hopping was involved, it wasn’t the easiest of crossings). The level of the stream could change the feasibility of this. A more popular option was changing into a pair of water shoes and fording the river.
While it’s a little cumbersome to carry the extra weight of shoes throughout the hike, we actually recommend crossing in a pair of water shoes as the cool water feels extremely refreshing after the warm hike. Ensure to pack a small towel as well to dry your feet off before putting your boots back on.
Tip #5
For hikers that stop to admire the surf at Hanakapi’ai Beach, it can be tempting to think about going for a swim. This is HIGHLY discouraged as drownings have happened here in the past. Instead take a dip in the stream previously aforementioned as its an equally cool but much safer alternative. The ankle to mid-thigh depth water may not be ideal for swimming but it’s quite refreshing with a much lower risk of drowning.
Tip #6
Cell phone service is pretty terrible even as you approach Hāʻena, so you’ll want to ensure you screenshot your reservation in advance. In that same vein, if you are visiting the park with a group that plans to split up, agree on a specific time and place to meet back up to mitigate any future concerns.
Tip #7
The full 22-mile hike was a bit more adventure than we were looking to get into for this vacation adventure, but there’s loads of awesome resources to help backpackers prepare and pack for the journey.
Final Notes
The Nāpali Coast is the crown jewel of Kauai, and we so hope you are able to enjoy exploring the coastline and views. This is such an unforgettable day hike and a must-do adventure on your next Kauai trip. Make sure you set a reminder to ensure you can snag reservations! We wish you all the best in your hiking endeavors.
Looking for what’s next on the itinerary? Curious about what else there is to do in Kauai? Check out our perfect, action packed four-day itinerary to maximize your time on Kauai. Hiking the Nāpali Coast is one thing, but seeing it by boat or plane is a whole other exhilarating experience.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Excited to spend 4 days exploring Kauai? Between the five of us sisters, we’ve visited a handful of times, and throughout our explorations, we’ve curated the perfect itinerary. From can’t miss sights to splurge-worthy treats to niched local stops, our four-day itinerary is the perfect way to maximize your time on Kauai.
Each of the Hawaiian islands has its own charm, and Kauai invokes a rather ethereal natural beauty. Kauai has been nicknamed the Garden Island, and one look at the lush landscape will tell you why. Nature’s bounty abounds in this tropical haven of outdoor adventure. From hiking through the dazzling Nā Pali Coast coast to wandering through the immense Waimea Canyon, the magnitude of Kauai is impressive– especially for being such a relatively small island!
While Kauai is not immune to the heavy tourism the Hawaiian islands experience, you will find it less populated and a bit more rural than its neighboring islands, such as Oahu or Maui. This generally lends itself to less shopping and late night dining options and more steal-your-breath hikes and outdoor adventures, allowing for more natural, unmarred Hawaiian beauty.
Despite Kauai being relatively small, there is no circumferential road around the island. This is due to the immense topography of the northwest region. Efforts have been made in the past to try and connect the loop, but they have all been in vain. Some areas are just meant to remain untouched! While this might mean a little extra driving time, the views in Kauai are nothing short of spectacular, so get excited for a little extra time in the car taking in the scenery.
You wouldn’t have amazing canyons, emerald cliff coastlines, and astounding waterfalls without the terrain Kauai is known for. The island is our favorite because of its rugged charm, not in spite of! At the end of four days, you’ll already be trying to plan your next trip back!
DAY ONE
Due to the spread out nature of Kauai, a rental car is a must if you really want to see what the island has to offer. Last time we visited we rented from Budget, and loved our ride. When we were picking our car up, we were offered an inexpensive upgrade to a convertible mustang, and jumped on it. While a convertible isn’t always the most practical choice, we found it afforded us panoramic views of the scenery whenever we were driving. Additionally, when we drove at night, whichever one of us was the passenger was able to recline and have a truly fantastic view of the stars.
We’ve also rented a through Turo a couple times in the past, and had great success with that as well. Regardless who you rent from, don’t forget to sunscreen-up if you’re driving with the top down!
Big Love for Hyatt
Time to ditch the bags and start exploring! While there’s thousands of options to choose from, we recommend staying on the south side of the island— at Grand Hyatt Kauai Resort and Spa, if you’re looking to splurge. If you arrive in the morning, they’ll store your bags for you, so you don’t miss out on any adventuring time. It’s by no means guaranteed, but they actually comped us each an appetizer and drink, while we waited for our room to be ready. Can you say amazing customer service?!
The sprawling property and ample restaurants to chose from are a great way to stretch your legs and grab a bite after your flight. The Captain’s Bar is pool-side, making it an easy stop. The drinks are amazing, and the nachos disappear quickly!
Birds Eye View
Heading back to the airport so soon? Get excited for an airplane tour with AirVentures. This tour is an INCREDIBLE way to start the trip, and it can actually help shape your plan for the subsequent days, if you catch a glimpse of anything particularly enticing. From your perch in the sky, you’ll see whales breaching, gorgeous Waimea Canyon, the lush Hanalei Valley, and Manawaiopuna Falls (from Jurassic Park). Not to mention the crown jewel: a dazzlingly Nā Pali Coastline. You’ll be able to enjoy the coastline from a few different vantage-points while in Kauai, but this one is almost guaranteed to be the most amazing.
Pro trip #1: Try to snag the co-pilot seat if you can. This will have the best view as it’s the least obstructed and best for taking photographs.
Pro tip #2: While they have a handful of different time slots throughout the day, in the winter-time, the mid-afternoon is the most ideal for the perfect Nā Pali Coast views. The coastline is on the west side of the island, so if you go too early in the day, the breath-taking views are still illustrious but a little shadowed.
Back at the Ranch
Returning to the resort, hop into your bathing suit and enjoy some relaxing pool time. There are so many pools to choose from… or perhaps floating through them all on the lazy river is more your style. Just before the sun sets, make your way towards the ocean, and watch the daylight slip away, from your cozy vantage point on a swing or bench. Shipwreck Beach, the beach behind the Hyatt Grand, doesn’t get a view of the sunset, BUT depending on the time of year, you might get lucky enough to spot whales playing out in the ocean. (As a note, Shipwreck Beach is a public beach, so even if you aren’t staying there, it’s an option for exploration.)
Finish your evening at the Seaview Terrace for some dinner and drinks. As you might imagine, the tables are set up on a terrace overlooking the property and ocean, and with nightly live music, it makes for a groovy ambiance. The fresh air and delicious skewers are a delightful end to your first day.
DAY TWO
The Kalalau Trail
Today’s big adventure? Hiking the gorgeous Nā Pali Coast. From the south part of the island, it takes a little under two hours to make it up to Haena State Park, where the trail starts. You’ll want to head out early to make it to the Haena by mid-morning, making this a perfect morning to catch the sunrise before heading out.
The Kalalau Trail is a 22 mile round trip stretch of hiking through the Nā Pali Coast. Determined hikers and backpackers may conquer this in its entirety; however, due to limited time on the island, we only recommend tackling a 4-mile loop of the trail. Many avid hikers may consider a 4 mile hike easy peasy, but the elevation in conjunction with the muddy nature of the trail makes a 4 mile trek moderately difficult, even for experienced hikers.
Pro tip #1: A limited number of people are allowed into Haena State Park each day, so you must make reservations in advance to be admitted into the park. The tickets for daily admission go VERY quickly. They become available 30 days prior, so if you are hoping to visit Haena State Park, you should be ready to purchase your ticket early in the morning 30 days out. Spots go quickly! For more information, check out our blog post on The Kalalau Trail.
Pro tip #2: Don’t forget to screenshot your reservation before going. There is no cell service at the guard shack.
Beach Bum
Depending on how much daylight you have left to burn after you’re done hiking, there’s a couple options for exploration in the north part of the island. If you’re tuckered out from the morning, head to Hanalei Beach for some well-earned relaxation. There’s a long pier that stretches into the bay, providing a top-notch view of a memorable landscape, as the sandy beach stretches out to a mountainous backdrop.
Either on your way to or from the beach, swing by the Ching Young Village. There’s shops and loads of casual restaurants that make grabbing a snack or meal super easy. We snagged a dole whip from Aloha Juice Bar and found it quite refreshing.
Bottoms Up
If you have any interest in craft distillery tours, stopping by Hanalei Spirits is an absolute MUST. You will be blown away by the heart and the history behind their spirits. You will not find a better Kauai souvenir than a bottle of their traditional Hawaiian Okolehao. Tours are done by appointment only with Vindi, who is as warm and kind as she is knowledgable about using the land to create their spirits. Be sure to schedule in advance if you’re hoping to hear their story and sample all their local spirits!
Pit Stops
On the way back south, you’ll pass through the quaint town of Kappa. As you drive through, there’s a stretch of shops and restaurants, each more intriguing than the next. If you haven’t tried ‘lau lau’ yet, the Kahula pork lau lau at Pono Market is worth. pulling. over. for.
If you’re in the mood for a little pick-me-up, Kauai Juice Company sells a wide array of curated juices and kombuchas. While they are a little spendy, we tried four juices and a few different kombuchas while we were there, and wished we’d bought more! So refreshing after a day outside.
While you’re in Hawaii, you have to try a shaved ice at some point. A local recommended Wailua Shave Ice Kauai to us, and we were so delighted with our frozen treats. Two people could easily share one; however, with such diverse flavors on the menu, it’s hard not to pick your own.
DAY THREE
Ahoy Mates
Prepare yourself for a day jam-packed with nature’s beauty. Setting sail with Captain Andy’s Na Pali Coast Tour means an early start and a lovely day out on the boat. Happiness is the feeling of the sun on your face and the wind in your hair as you lounge on a 65-foot sailboat. While the main objective is views of the Nā Pali Coast, visiting in winter almost guarantees a whale sighting or two. We’ve been lucky enough to encounter a pod of dolphins and some sea turtles as well.
As with any tour, the crew and captain are nothing short of amazing. From keeping everyone safe, well-fed, and happy to providing local recommendations, everyone goes above and beyond to make it a lovely trip out on the water. The tour includes breakfast, fresh juice, lunch, and drinks. Chef Dion is a rockstar, and so everything will be delicious!
Pro tip: throughout the winter months, the ocean tends to become more choppy later in the day, so if you’re visiting December through February, your best bet will be getting out in the morning. If you are visiting in late spring, summer, or early fall, you might be better off going on an afternoon tour. By mid-afternoon, the sun has swung to the west side of the island, pulling the Nā Pali Coast from the shadows and putting it on prominent display.
It’s amazing how much time of day affects the color palette of the coastline.
Canyon ‘O Canyon
Waimea Canyon State Park has been dubbed the Grand Canyon of the Pacific, and once you catch a glimpse, you’ll understand why. This immense canyon is shaded in hues of green and orange, making it quite the sight to behold. While you’re driving through the park, there are a myriad of viewpoints and overlooks, so if you miss one, there will be another! The sheer quantity of lookout points means you do not have to go hiking to “earn” a fantastic view; however, there are ample hiking trails to discover throughout the park.
Note: It can get a little chilly and windy up here, so be sure you have a jacket or wind-breaker to keep you warm.
Sunset
Maximizing your views during daylight hours means catching the sunset at MacArthur Beach (also called Kekaka Beach Park). A less touristy beach spot, this is the perfect place to come dig your toes into the sand as you watch the sun slip away. Plus, depending on when you depart, this may be your last chance to catch a Hawaii sunset.
Big Brewski
After a long day, rest your weary bones at Kauai Island Brewing Company to enjoy some good food and drinks. So close to the ocean, it’s hard not to enjoy the seafood. We both ordered fish (delish), but heard good things about their pizza from multiple sources. Their beers more than hit the spot.
DAY FOUR
Power Start to the Day
The Maha’ulepu Heritage Trail is about a four-mile loop round trip, but this trail is far less of a hike and more of a scenic walk. Starting at Shipwreck Beach, this makes for an easy departure as The Grand Hyatt Kauai Resort and Spa is right on Shipwreck Beach. There’s nothing like knowing you have an imminent flight to make you want to stretch your legs a little extra!
Big Chillin‘
Perhaps you’re less keen on long walks and more preferential towards passively soaking up the sun. Take in the relaxing sunny warmth and lull of the ocean poolside or with your toes in the sand. Grand Hyatt Kauai has no shortage of pools to enjoy— plus a fun saltwater lagoon. Hammocks, swings, and jacuzzis really provide endless opportunities to bask in the sun.
The Anara Spa is on the grounds, and it’s a perfect way to unwind luxuriously. From massages to facials, and everything in between, the Anara Spa delivers calming, tropical healing in spades. A spent unwinding at the Grand Hyatt Kauai flies by… check out our blog post reviewing the property for everything there is to do!
Sushi Please
Stevenson’s Library is one of the restaurants on property at the Hyatt. Whether you’re seated at the gorgeous koa wood bar or outside in the open-air lanai, the ambiance exudes an air of cultivated relaxation, with sweeping ocean views. Even if you aren’t staying at the resort, the sushi is worth going out of your way for. If you’re in the mood for a drink, dive into their chapter book of inventive martinis, tropical cocktails, and both classic and creative whiskey drinks. They also have sake, beer, and wine… something for everyone!
Just a heads up, if you know you want to check this spot out, make a reservation. If you make a last minute decision to head there for dinner, make sure you arrive early as it’s not uncommon for there to be a line 5-10 parties deep waiting for the doors to open.
Beer Me
Kauai Beer Company has a perfect pre-departure location as it’s less than 5 minutes from the airport. With excellent food and beer options, it’s a perfect way to indulge in one last local fix before you head home.
Kauai in Review
If you’re looking for staggering feats of nature and abounding luscious landscapes, Kauai should be at the top of your travel bucket list. That being said, you will not find extensive night life or high-end shopping here. Kauai is not immune to the reflections of tourism; however, Kauai is inviting to visitors so enthralled by her natural beauty, the tawdry of mainstream tourism isn’t found here .
When visiting the Hawaiian Islands, it’s not uncommon to try and fit in visits to more than one island. As such, this can mean figuring out how to allot your days. In our opinion, four days/three nights is the minimum you should set aside for Kauai. While it’s not a large island, nature shows off in a big way here. Our four-day agenda is rather action packed, so you could spread this out over six days if you have more time and desire a bit slower pace.
Considering heading to Big Island? Check out our six-day itinerary to maximize your time adventuring around this large, diverse isle.
All photographs contained in this blog post were taken by the sisters of Five Wandering Soles, unless otherwise noted.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
The largest in the Hawaiian archipelago, the Island of Hawai’i is fondly referred to as Big Island. The moniker is certainly well suited as the breadth of landscape here is unmatched. From snow-covered mountains to black sand beaches to active volcanos to luscious green valleys, there is truly no end to the adventures that await on Big Island. With this action-packed one week itinerary, you will get to experience it ALL!
Each Hawaiian island has its own ambiance or draw. Big Island is unmatched in its sprawling landscape and diverse microbiome. It’s also one of the best places in the world to snorkel with manta rays, which is a truly surreal experience. Big Island is a perfect destination for anyone looking for both the beautiful coastal scenery Hawaii is known for, as well as endless breathtaking hikes, catching a peek at some molten lava, and watching the sunset from an almost 14,000-foot snowy mountain top.
With the Island of Hawai’i being as large as it is, one week affords you enough time to hit the highlights and capture the essence of Big Island.
While you may think of Hawaii as a beachy keen relaxation destination, you will assuredly miss out if you spend your entire trip at the beach… or even worse, the pool. Below we have detailed the perfect itinerary for anyone looking to make the most of their days adventuring around on Big Island.
The Nitty Gitty Before Paradise City
Remember, Big Island is just that…. rather big, which means in order to see everything, you will want a rental car. In order to hit all the highlights, you will be putting in some time in the car driving around, but all your drives come with breath-taking views, so it won’t feel like a hardship.
Big Island has the most climate diversity and is more spread out than her sister islands. Vibe check: pretty laid back. There’s not going to be as much retail shopping or late night dining options. That being said, there will be gorgeous hikes, snorkeling, and sandy beaches available in spades!
DAY ONE
Depending on where you flew in from and when you departed is largely going to dictate how much you’ll be looking to do upon arrival.
Keeping the day-one itinerary light, an easy first post-flight activity is a nice walk along the beach. Wawaloli Beach Park is close to the airport and makes for a lovely first stop, with lots of little tide pools to explore. As a bonus, there’s restrooms and showers here, so even if you get a bit spirited in your walking about, you can rinse off before you get back in the car.
Catching your first Hawai’i sunset will be a priority. Along Ali’i Drive, behind the Kona Inn Shopping Village, there’s a large grassy area that stretches up to a seawall. This creates a perfect, relaxing perch to watch the sun go down. As a bonus, there’s a plethora of restaurants and shops in this area if you want to wander around and grab dinner. A scoop of gelato from Gypsea Gelato will be just the perfect cool dessert to accompany your dreamy sunset views.
Hilo-Bound
Logistically it makes the most sense to arrive and depart from the same airport, so even though you’ll likely arrive in Kona, we suggest hopping in the car and scooting on over to Hilo on day-one, so you can start day-two already there. The drive across the island is pretty easy. If you end up driving at night, there aren’t any street lights on Saddle Road, which is less of a safety concern and far more of a delight for the star-gazing passengers.
A note for late arrivals: Most dining establishments are not open past typical dinner hours, so if you have an evening flight, your post-8pm options will be limited. Open until 9:30pm, Hawaiian BBQ Deli is a fantastic fast-casual option in the Kailua-Kona area. The plates are delicious as well as large, so it’s easily shared between two people.
DAY TWO
There’s a certain beauty to exploring a new place by just wandering around and getting a little lost. Having an Airbnb or hotel walking distance from the downtown area makes this an easy way to start the day.
If you’re looking to cover a little extra ground, consider using the Hawai’i Island Bikeshare system to cruise around. There’s a post near Russell Carroll Mo’oheau Country Park, which is super accessible. Either walk or ride down to the Liliuokalani Gardens… a serene garden that provides gorgeous views of Hilo Bay and the cityscape. Fun to both walk and bike through!
Back downtown, Kula Shave Ice has some fantastic shaved ice and açaí bowls… we can personally attest that the Hilo Bowl makes for a great post-bike ride treat. The Hilo Farmer’s Market is open every day of the week, but Wednesday and Saturday are their bigger market days, with more vendors.
Mauna Kea
The afternoon is all about Mauna Kea. Who goes to Hawai’i and expects to find a snowy mountain? Despite being a little out of place in a tropical paradise, watching the sunset from the top of this mountain is a must for any Big Island traveler.
It takes a little over an hour to get from Hilo to the Mauna Kea Visitor Center (VIS), but before you leave, pack yourself a tasty lunch— or at the very least some hearty snacks. You won’t find a food court on Mauna Kea. You’ll also want to pack an extra bottle of water or two as well… you’d always rather have too much as opposed to not enough! The suggested amount is 500 ml (about two cups) per person per hour.
Once you arrive at the VIS, take a minute to stretch your legs and walk through the center. It’s interesting to learn a bit about the mountain and talk to the rangers. This stop is not only a nice break, but it’s even more important than that. It’s highly recommended to spend 30 minutes at the VIS acclimating to the altitude. Mauna Kea is unique in its environment– there’s not many places in the world that allow you to go from beachside (elevation = 0 ft) to almost 14,000 ft. elevation in 2 hours. As such, it’s important to take some time to ensure your body can handle it. Altitude sickness is no joke!
If you’re feeling good, there’s a less than 1 mile unnamed hike that begins across the road from the VIS. Not only did it provide a beautiful vantage point to take in neighboring Mauna Loa, but it makes for a nice litmus test to assess how you’d do hiking at elevation.
The Summit
From the VIS, the summit is only 8 miles, but due to the grade and unpaved road, it will take another 30 minutes to reach the summit. We recommend leaving the VIS to head up at least an hour before sunset, so you can walk around a bit and snag yourself a good spot to watch the sunset.
If you’re an avid hiker and the elevation doesn’t scare you, leave 2 hours before sunset to make time for a detour. On your way up, stop at the third gravel parking lot, just past mile marker 7, to find Lake Waiau. This isn’t what you’d call a popular or frequently traveled trail, but there should be a visible path to follow.
The hike is about 1.5 miles round trip, but if you’re not used to hiking at elevation, you may find this short hike a bit more challenging than expected. Lake Waiau is considered a sacred space, so taking the effort to see this unique natural phenomenon is special. For more information on Lake Waiau or hiking around, check out our Mauna Kea blog post)
Once you’re at the summit, break out your jacket (don’t forget to pack one!) and find a good spot to watch the sun go down. Watching the sun set above the clouds at 13,796 feet is a breath-taking way to end the day. Once the sun is gone, make your way back down to the VIS. Believe it or not, the star-gazing is actually better at the lower elevation. Keep your eyes peeled… you might see a shooting star or two!
Important notes:
You NEED a car with four wheel drive (4WD) or all wheel drive with low range, with 4WD being the preferred option. Between the unpaved road and the steep grade, this is important not only on the way up, but to safely get down from the mountain as well. You do NOT want any brake overheating or failure.
Another car tip, be sure to leave Kona with a full tank. You must have at least half a tank of gas before you begin your ascent to the summit from the VIS.
Do not plan to summit Mauna Kea if you have been scuba diving in the past 24 hours. The extent of pressure changes in that amount of time and the excess nitrogen accumulated can cause decompression sickness.
Pro-trip: if you plan on stargazing at the visitor’s center, park in the spots facing AWAY from the visitor’s center. Car headlights are rather disruptive to people trying to stargaze and star-gazing enthusiasts will get feisty with you.
Between the five of us, we’ve driven up a handful of times, so it’s nothing to be scared of, you just definitely want to make sure you are prepared when you’re planning your trip! If navigating the car situation sounds too intimidating for you, there’s various commercial tour services available to choose from. Most will provide you with a ride as well as a nice warm jacket, so you don’t have to worry about packing that!
Cheers To You
Rolling back into Hilo, make a beeline straight forOla Brew to enjoy ice-cold beer and some hard-earned dinner. Going to a craft brewery, you expect delicious beers (and they deliver), but we were SO impressed with all the food there as well. Guaranteed to leave you wanting more, the Kalbi Meatballs shared plate is *chefs kiss* fantastic, and the A’A was Salvador’s favorite beer. If you only visit one brewery during your trip, it should be Ola!
DAY THREE
The name of the game today is exploring as much of the Hawai’i Volcano National Park (HVNP) as you can… because how often in life does one have the opportunity to see a volcano? Heading south from Hilo, HVNP is an easy 45 minutes south.
When you arrive, the visitor center should be your first stop. It functions as an excellent starting point to make a game plan, empty your bladder, and lather on the sunscreen. There are interactive maps and park rangers available to help direct you wherever you need to head.
Crater Rim Drive
Next up? Continue along Crater Rim Drive and park near the Kīlauea Iki trail or the Thurston lava tube. These areas are close to one another and easily walkable, so snag a parking spot wherever you can. The lava tube isn’t anything too crazy, but it’s worth checking out just to experience how dark it gets down there— plus it’s wild to think lava once rushed through the underground tube you’re standing in.
Across the road from the lava tube is the beginning of the Kīlauea Iki trail, which will lead you down to the floor of the Kīlauea Iki Crater. It doesn’t take long to wind your way down to the crater floor, and from there, the trail is marked with cairns, or small stone piles, to keep visitors on track.
Just putting your walking shoes to work, your next stop will be driving to the Crater Rim Drive trailhead and wandering out to the Keanakākoʻi Overlook. Not only does this perch provide a glimpse at the Keanakākoʻi Crater, but it affords a spectacular view of Kīlauea. Kīlauea is an active volcano that intermittently erupts, most recently in September 2024. While this view would be interesting any time, walking out to this viewpoint is a MUST when Kīlauea is erupting. How many erupting volcanoes are you going to see in one lifetime?!
Chain of Craters Road
In what seems like a world away, the 20 mile drive out to the southern sea cliffs is beyond scenic as the landscape changes drastically before your very eyes. From the jungle-esque tropics near the visitor’s center, to the endless span of volcanic rock, to the stunning blue of the ocean crashing into a wide swath southern coastline, the drive out to the Hōlei Sea Arch is its own delight.
Once you’re there, a short walk will take you to the Hōlei Sea Arch, serving as an example of both the ocean’s power and nature’s sculpting. The dynamic surf makes for a hypnotic view as the crashing waves slowly erode the southern coastline. Being rather set apart from the more popular areas of the park, it’s easy to consider skipping a visit to the Hōlei Sea Arch, but you have to remember the drive itself is as amazing as the coastline views themselves.
The Southern Loop
When you’ve had your fill of HVNP, it’s time to begin the drive back to Kona, but the return visit will be filled with a couple pit-stops.
First up, cruise to Punalu’u Black Sand Beach. The sand is an inky black, a plentiful byproduct of the lava rock’s erosion. Keep your eyes peeled for sea turtles as they’re popular here!
If you’re a thrill seeker, looking for an adrenaline rush, be sure to stop by South Point. Not only is this the southernmost point in the United States, but it’s a known spot for cliff diving— with an approximately 40 to 60-foot drop down into the ocean below. The water there is usually 20-30 ft deep, and there’s a ladder hanging down to aid adrenaline junkies in their climb back up. Definitely not for everyone, but certainly a unique opportunity. Begs the age old question…. if your friends decided to jump off a cliff, would you jump too?
It goes without saying, but cliff jumping is always performed at your own risk, and should only be considered when conditions are safe. Not only is there the jump itself to consider but one also must be able to climb back up out of the water. Never do anything you’re not comfortable with, and always trust your gut!
If you’re still kickin’ and feeling a bit groovy after all that adventure, Gertrude’s Jazz Bar, back in Kona, makes for a sensational end to the day. With amazing craft cocktails and effervescent live music, this is the Hawaiian night cap (or two!) you’ll miss once you’re back home
DAY FOUR
Snorkel Exploration
About 30 minutes south of Kona, you’ll find Two Step Beach– right next to Pu’uhonua O Honaunau National Historic Park (also worth checking out if you have time!). You don’t have to pay to get into the park to access Two Step, but if you’re interested in the park, it could function as an easy multi-purpose parking spot. If you just want to snorkel, there’s a $5 parking lot available, directly across the street from the beach.
Two Step is called a beach, but it lacks a sandy shoreline. Instead the lava rock meets the ocean, with a natural two-level shelf that allows snorkelers to enter and exit the bay area with ease. The water is crystal clear, with a colorful assortment of fish. The sea urchins are also plentiful, but as long as you’re aware of your surroundings, it’s more than safe.
Kealakekua Bay is another notoriously good snorkeling spot nearby. Kealakekua Bay is reachable via neighborhood parking and a short walk OR, if you’re looking to take the road less traveled, a 4-mile round trip hike. That being said, this hike lacks shade and is rather gravelly, so we recommend saving your morning energy for snorkeling and diving around.
Cheap Thrills
Next up on the agenda? Cliff diving! Heading back up north toward Kona, End of The World makes for your next potential thrilling adventure, or perhaps just a gorgeous view. It’s a short yet gravelly walk from the parking area to the lava rock lookouts.
While it’s a common theme on Big Island, the contrast of the sparkling blue water against the black lava rock is nothing short of enchanting. It’s so relaxing to sit back and listen to the rhythm of the water… not many people can do that at home!
Context clues are huge. If it’s good day for jumping, there will be loads of people— of all ages— jumping in. If there’s no one around but powerful waves, it’s your sign to just post up in the shade and take in nature from above. It’s worth saying twice, never do anything you’re not comfortable with, and always trust your gut!
hike it out
Heading north past Kona, your next destination is Kiholo Bay. There’s an easy-to-zip-past-if-you-don’t-know-its-there parking lot a little north of mile marker 81 on Queen Ka’ahumanu Highway. It’s about a mile hike down to the bay, and shade coverage is intermittent, so ensure you bring some water with you. Full disclosure, the hike itself is pretty nondescript, but the trail leads you right to a lagoon area, which is incredibly serene. Keep an eye out for sea turtles swimming around.
The easy to miss parking lot and one mile hike out to the coast make this a less touristy locale. If you’re looking to have a few moments to yourself with nature, this is a lovely spot. You can walk along the beach to your heart’s content, but the trail goes all the way down to Wainanalii Lagoon making it about 5.5 miles round trip.
DAY FIVE
There’s nothing like a good breakfast to start the day off right. With a morning full of hiking on the agenda, 808 Grindz Cafe is the perfect spot to ensure we were all fueled up for some hiking. As you head north on the island, you won’t need your phone to occupy you, as the ever-changing topography is rapturing.
Pololu Valley
The drive from Kona should take less than an hour and a half, but it will be your first sampling of just how amazing it is to get a little lost in the countryside of Hawaii. As you drive, keep an eye out into the ocean (or perhaps just have your passengers stay on the lookout), because it’s possible to see whales breaching from the road as they migrate to Hawaii’s warm waters from December to March.
The farthest north of the seven valleys etched into the northern coastline, Pololu Valley is immediately gorgeous. Upon arrival, you are greeted with magnificent views of the valley from the lookout point. From there, the trail leads down to a gorgeous black sand beach.
The black sand beach and peaceful creek make this a nice area to relax. The Awini trail previously continued to a lookout over the Honokane Nui Valley, but in the years since our last visit, this trail has closed down. This serves as an important reminder to be a respectful visitor… if the land isn’t preserved and respected, opportunities (and unique hikes) will disappear!
Pro tip: if you’re adverse to a nature-pee, make sure you stop at a gas station or grocery store before you reach Pololu because there are no facilities there. No bathrooms, no place to fill your water bottle… nothing. On a busier day, a business savvy local may be found perched near the lookout with a chest full of ice cold waters, juices, and hard seltzers for sale. That being said, he’s not guaranteed to be there, so I recommend arriving prepared.
Post-Hike Delights
All that hiking works up an appetite, so we suggest making your way to Big Island Brewhaus. Lunch is delicious… we can personally attest to the fish bites, burrito, and BLT being perfect post-hike sustenance. Even if you’re not hungry, their craft beers alone were worth stopping by for!
Tickets to the Alien Ballet
You can’t have a full day of adventures without including some evening exploration! Kona is one of a handful of places in the world where you have the opportunity to observe manta rays as they feed. The experience itself is rather wild. Manta rays feed on plankton, which are attracted to sunlight, or at night, the LED light boards put in the water.
As a front row observer, you hold onto the board and merely watch as the mantas astound. They will perform endless barrel rolls and skim along the board— they might even accidentally bump into you once or twice. It’s truly so unlike anything either you may have seen or experienced before. We highly recommend Hawaiian Adventures– we rather enjoyed being part of a small-group tour. Be sure to pack your GoPro or underwater camera!
Sometimes weather can affect tour safety, so booking an activity in the beginning/middle of your trip, may help ensure you actually get to go. If something happens, you can always re-organize your days to make another evening work!
As a note, manta rays are not social creatures, so observing them in their natural habitat is not inherently harmful to them. If you’re interested in manta ray conservation, you can check this out.
DAY SIX
Rise and shine! Spearfishing means an early start to the day, but what a cool way to spend your morning? For any newbie fishermen (or women!) the sequencing Top Shot Spearfishing offers will have you feeling comfortable and confident in do time. The day starts in an open-air classroom where everyone undergoes their spearfishing training to ensure safety and comfortability with the tools and environment. Only once everyone is comfortable does the group head out to the ocean.
Once in the water, the skills on land are integrated in the security of shallow water before the dives are attempted. After spending about two and a half hours out in the ocean, the group heads back to shore with their catches. Top Shot specifically targets invasive species, which is a unique way to use tourism for the island’s betterment. All harvested fish are gut, cleaned, and bagged for successful spearfishers to go make themselves a hard-earned lunch.
Beach Bum Lyfe
After waking up early and working hard all morning, the afternoon vibes are inherently more relaxed. Magic Sands Beach is close-by and it’s the perfect spot to take an afternoon cat nap… if it’s there. The name ‘magic sands’ belies the dynamic presence of the sand. Sometimes it’s there, but other times the tide pulls all the sand out and away.
If you’re looking to try and hit all the breweries on the Island, Kona Brewing make for a nice spot to get out of the sun and enjoy a beer. While Kona Brewing does have a food menu, the street it’s on has a bunch of different options for food, so you can snag whatever strikes your fancy.
From there, either get to walking or hop in the car and head to the Old Kona Airport for sunset. Less than a mile away, this hidden gem is a nice spot to enjoy the sunset away from your fellow tourists. If you thought the current Kona airport is small, the old airport will make it look huge! This area has been turned into a state recreation area… the old runway now serves as a parking lot for the adjacent beach. Definitely low-key but that’s what makes this a perfect peaceful sunset spot!
DAY SEVEN
After spending the last week zooming around the island, your last day should be spent relaxing by the beach. Kauna’oa Beach is arguably the best beach on the island, making it the obvious choice for your sandy leisure-time.
Kauna’oa Beach, like all beaches in Hawaii, is a public beach, but it’s located within The Mauna Kea Beach Hotel. While this may seem a bit confusing, you do not have to be a guest of the hotel to enjoy access to the beach. As a matter of fact, it’s a great way to relax on a gorgeous beach, with access to restrooms, showers, amazing food (and drink) options, and beach equipment rentals. Kids and adults alike can enjoy snorkeling here, but there’s no lifeguard on duty.
The Mauna Kea Beach Hotel averages around $800/night, which is definitely a splurge. As a visitor for the day, parking will cost $21, which may seem a little spendy, but it’s ultimately worth it for the nearby amenities. The public parking lot only holds about 30 cars, so if this sounds like your ideal beach hang, you’ll want to make sure you arrive early to lock down a parking spot. The only downside? This sweet getaway is about 45 minutes north of Kona, but compared to some of you other days of driving, that’s nothing!
peace out girl scout
Once you’re back in Kona, swing by Poi Dog Deli for some fantastic sandwiches to-go and enjoy your dinner with a sunset view. Nothing like ending your trip just how you started it— at your day-one perch along the seawall.
Safe travels back home!
What do ya know?
Big Island holds a special place in our hearts because McKenna (2021) and Dana (2022) each spent 4 months living here while working with the Christian ministry group: Youth With A Mission (YWAM). They spent all their free time exploring and adventuring around, which made them perfect hosts for visiting sisters and friends— hence the perfectly crafted itinerary. We hope you have the most amazing time visiting Hawaii and all she has to share!
If island hopping is the name of your Hawaii-adventure-game, Kauai is the perfect pairing for Big Island. The garden island offers completely different and astonishingly beautiful coastlines, hikes, and waterfalls. Be sure to check out our Kauai blog post if you’re planning to visit.
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
The common moniker, The Last Frontier, is about as accurate a description as any state could have. Born and raised in Oregon, I thought I knew what the “Wild West” had to offer. I have been lucky enough, since our move to Wisconsin, to befriend a colleagues that grew up in Fairbanks, Alaska. As such, this friendship has afforded me the opportunity to visit this massive state in a couple different occasions. Such as life, it always seems to come down to who you know! This round, I was lucky enough to accompany a group of rowdy, and diverse group of individuals to take a weeklong road trip gallivanting around from Fairbanks to Valdez.
Although this was my second time in this amazing state, the views, topography, and overall essence of nature was just as awe-inspiring. We visited during the summer, which has the infamous 24-hours of sunlight. This is no cheeky saying either, so be prepared— don’t forget your sunscreen… or a sleeping mask!
Download a good podcast, make a groovy playlist, and prepare all your best road trip games, because the round trip drive time from Fairbanks down to Valdez and back is right around 13 hours. While this sounds lengthy (and it is), it’s really not so bad when you take into account a couple things. First and foremost, that’s 13 hours driven over the course of a week, so you’re really not putting in toooo much milage any given day. Secondly, you’re driving around in Alaska! Sweeping vistas and wild animal spottings are all but guaranteed! A beautiful long drive just means a little extra time to appreciate nature.
DAY ONE
Flying into Fairbanks, this will function as both the beginning and end of your road tripping journey. Most of your arrival day will be navigating logistics… picking up the van, grocery shopping, etc. If you happen to arrive early in the day and have already picked up your rental, Denali National Park is a little over a two hour drive away— a bit of a drive for a day trip, but certainly an immense feat of natural beauty. At the end of the day, enjoy a good night’s sleep in a real bed, because it’s about to be a week of van life and sleeping bags!
DAY TWO
As you head out of town, with the wind in your hair, you ride Highway 2 all the way to Clearwater State Recreation Site (CSRS). This stop in the journey comes about 2 hours after departure, so it’s a perfect opportunity to stretch your legs and take in your first Alaskan State Park.
It adds a bit of time, but the town of North Pole is along the way (only 15 minutes south of Fairbanks) if you want to see where all those letters addressed to Sant end up being sent!
The campsite at CSRS operates on first come, first serve availability, so arriving early is in your best interest if you’re keen to camp out there. Eleven miles off the highway, this is a bit of a hidden gem. A bit too early in the day for us to set up camp, we fished for a while and then kept heading south.
Another hour or two down the road, our second and final stop of the day was at the Fielding Lake Recreation Site. We arrived with plenty of time to catch some arctic graylings— they made for an unexpectedly tasty breakfast the next morning!
Road trip blues: it’s worth nothing that a few times along the way, we encountered traffic snags due to construction. They lasted anywhere from 5 minutes to an hour, so have a rockin’ road trip playlist ready for jamming out help time fly.
DAY THREE
After a warm breakfast over the campfire, it’s time to pack up and roll out. Next stop? Valdez!
Taking the drive at a leisurely pace, stopping at any streams that look like they might have a fish or two swimming through, Eagles Rest RV Park will be the final destination on your road trip adventure. With ample space to set up camp, this will be home base for the next few days.
If you’re in the mood for pizza, follow your nose to The Fat Mermaid. It might sound a little crazy, but the smoked salmon pizza is actually delicious… besides, where else would you find smoked salmon as a pizza topping???
DAY FOUR
For the first full day in Valdez, you head out on the water. We rented a boat through Valdez Outfitters, and could not recommend them more. If you feel comfortable captaining your own vessel, your fishing excursion will be considerably cheaper. Alaska-native Ward Dobbs was part of our motley crew, so we felt comfortable going out without additional chartering; however, if you are completely new to Valdez or boating, you may be better off letting someone else do the driving. Plus a captain just might know all the secret spots where the fish like to bite.
The boat ride out to the Prince William Sound takes about an hour or two either way, so this really does become an all day adventure. While catching fish is never guaranteed, if you spend all day out on the water this time of year, you will be hard pressed to not end up with at least a couple fish in your cooler. Plus– you can hardly find a more majestic background to accompany your fishing pursuits.
DAYS FIVE & SIX
Back to back days of fishing to your heart’s content! With loads of fishing in the Valdez area, you can pretty much drop a line in anywhere. One day we took Richardson Highway to Dayville Road and followed it around the Lowe River to an area near the Allison Point Campground.
Another day we just stopped at various pull-outs along the Lowe River and spent an entire day fishing for pinkies. Not quite an action packed agenda, but there’s nothing quite like spending the day along the water with your buddies…. plus fresh fish for dinner!
DAY SEVEN
Rolling out of Valdez, it’s time to make the long trek back up to Fairbanks. If you’re looking to break the journey up a bit, King For A Day Campground and Charters is a nice spot to drop a line in the water and fish for some reds or sockeyes.
Once you’re back in the car, follow the road all the way back up to Big Delta. While we didn’t stay at a campground specifically, there’s plentiful open space to pull off the road and set up your final campsite. Theres nothing quite like watching the sunlight fade as you cook some salmon over a fire pit… what a perfect final camping meal.
All About the Journey
In a perfect world, this road trip clocks in at just over 13 hours round trip, but it’s likely to be a little longer with self-selected scenic detours along the way. While it’s certainly possible to drive all the way down to Valdez in one day, there’s so much more adventure in reveling in the stops along the way. When planning a road trip and camping trip, it’s less about the destination and far more about the journey there. The little stops to fish, wander down a stray road, or rock out in construction traffic while you take in the view are a huge part of what gives a trip like this its charm.
If you have never seen Denali, it’s always an option to take a slightly longer route back up through the Denali National Park on your way to Fairbanks. This adds a cool 4 hours to the drive, but it might just be worth it to see this monster of a mountain.
The most rugged state of them all, Alaska truly is the final frontier for breathtaking views of nature. While there’s a myriad of ways to enjoy the boundless, lush topography, there’s nothing quite like a camping road trip to make you feel connected to the Earth.
written by Salvador
While he isn’t an original member of the squad, he recently married Hannah, and is now fondly considered the-brother-we’ve-never-had by the rest of the sisters. Whenever Salvador travels, assessing the local craft beer scene is a top priority. His favorite foreign beer to date is an unattainable Belgium Brugse Zot he has been unable to find in the States the last few years. Salvador currently speaks two languages, English and Spanish, but every time he goes to Italy, his Italian gets a little better! To pass the time between thrilling excursions, Salvador is a professor of exercise physiology at UWL.
One of the great joys of life is traveling. Money spent exploring the world is money well spent, but money saved while traveling is even better. One of the easiest ways to cut costs while traveling is to use your points… more importantly, your World of Hyatt points. This is literally free money you accrue just by using (and paying off) your credit card each month!
One of our favorite hotel companies to book through when traveling is Hyatt. Not only have our stays here always been more than satisfactory, we have found we love spending the points we accrue through our more mundane stays to enjoy visiting some of their luxurious properties. Compared to other hotel partners, the redemption rate for even the most posh of the Hyatt brands is beyond reasonable for what you receive in return. Hyatt’s portfolio now includes more than 1,000 properties in 69 countries. These range from boutique hotels to all-inclusive resorts and everything in between.
Rack ‘Em & Stack ‘Em
Are you dying to travel but just can’t justify spending the money? It is time for you to up your credit card game. There’s two ways to accrue points for redemption at Hyatt properties.
World of Hyatt Credit Card
There’s two ways to accrue points for redemption at Hyatt properties. The more obvious of the two is signing up for a World of Hyatt credit card. This card offers a 30,000 point sign on bonus for spending $3,000 in the first three months of opening the card. Eager spenders and travelers can accrue up to an additional 30,000 points by earning 2 bonus points per $1 spent (up to $15,000) in the first 6 months of opening your account. You also receive a free night at any Category 1–4 Hyatt hotel or resort every year on your cardmember anniversary…. ca-ching!
The more you spend with your Hyatt card, the faster you accrue points and the elite levels of World of Hyatt membership exponentially increase your benefits. You can learn more about the levels of elite membership and milestone rewards here.
Chase
Chase is the only credit card company that maintains a partnership with Hyatt for transferring point balances. In order to do so, you must have one of Chase’s premium cards: Chase Sapphire Preferred, Chase Sapphire Reserve, or Chase Ink Business Preferred. These cards offer some pretty eye catching sign-up bonuses, easily transferred they equate to a couple nights in a lux hotel. If you travel often, one of these cards may generally be a good choice for you as they also have 2 other hotel partners and 13 airline partners as well.
It Takes Money to Make Money
While there’s both nuance and simplicity to earning Hyatt points, we’re here to help you make the most of them. Here’s a handful of tips we have learned over the years. Points are free money, so you have to make the most of them!
TIP #1
For the Chase Sapphire Preferred card, a 60,000 point sign up bonus is nice, but if you’re on the fence about it, you can always wait for Chase to sweeten the pot. In 2021, with travel beginning to resume, the sign-up bonus rose up to 100,000 points for a couple months over the summer. With almost double the usual benefit, the $95 annual fee is even more worthwhile, when considering the value of that quantity of points.
TIP #2
Ready for a trip? Points burning a hole in your pocket? Being able to transfer your points opens up some exciting point-saving opportunities. Before you book anything, check both the Chase Ultimate Rewards portal as well as what it would cost you in points to book directly through Hyatt.
When booking our stay at the Grand Hyatt Kauai we noticed that booking through the Chase Ultimate Rewards account was going to cost us over 52,000 points per night, while booking through our Hyatt account would only cost 33,000 points per night (and included Grand Club Lounge access). Your Chase points transfer in a 1:1 ratio, so by transferring your points, you could be saving yourself big time!
Below we have detailed an example with the comparison for travel to the Andaz in Costa Rica. Through World of Hyatt, the room runs at 17,000 points/night, for a total of 34,000 points. By comparison, the Chase Ultimate Rewards cost is 59,132 points PLUS another $346 dollars, just for the room and an additional $96 resort fee. It’s a no-brainer that you would be so much better off transferring your points over in a case like this!
redemption through Ultimate Rewards account
redemption through World of Hyatt account
[Just an FYI, you do not need a Hyatt credit card to transfer your points to Hyatt– signing up for a World of Hyatt account is free.]
TIP #3
When you are awarded a free night’s stay, it can be tempting to use that night for any random travel you might be doing, but give it a second thought before you book. Instead, save it for booking a category three or four property to get the most “bang” for your free-night-buck.
If you click on “Hotels & Resorts” and filter by hotel category, you can check out your best options.
TIP #4
Piggy-backing off that save-the-free-night-for-a- fancier-resort mentality, with Hyatt, when you book a resort entirely with points or redeem a free night, you do not have to pay a resort fee. While these fees vary from one property to another, they can add up to hundreds of dollars, depending on your length of stay.
TIP #5
If you have a World of Hyatt account, you receive a complimentary night at a category 1-4 property after you have stayed at five different brands under their Hyatt umbrella. What makes this especially enticing is that stays booked with points or other award nights are included in this count.
For example, if you used your points to book a couple nights at Andaz Maui, that would count as one of your five brands visited. This is essentially a fun game of Hyatt bingo. It certainly is not a primary factor in informing your hotel selection, butttt if you’re staying in a city with two different Hyatt brand hotels, this could be an easy deciding factor in which one to book.
TIP #6
Do you have an American Airlines AAdvantage Miles account? If you are an elite World of Hyatt member– this means you are a Discoversit, Globalist, or Explorist– you can earn 1 World of Hyatt Bonus Point for every $1 USD spent on qualifying American Airlines flights. This is *almost* like double dipping as you still received the AAdvantage miles you would already earn as an AAdvantage member. Who doesn’t want extra free points?
How Does It Stack Up?
If you are accustomed to using your points at a Hilton or Marriott hotel group, 30,000… or even 100,000 points might sound like it won’t get you very far. It’s important to recognize the difference here, because Hyatt point thresholds for redemption are much lower— for similar quality stays— as some of their competitor brands.
It’s also worth noting, if you sign up for the Chase Sapphire Preferred card and receive the 60,000 point bonus, you can transfer it to any of their three hotel partners: Hyatt, IGH, or Marriott. The points transfer in a 1:1 ratio to all companies, so unless you are highly preferential towards one of the other two brands, the 60,000 points are going to afford you more travel and luxury through Hyatt than either of the other options.
Have you ever visited a World of Hyatt resort? When we vacation, we find we enjoy adventuring around a bit more independently to truly get a feel for the culture of a given area, but we LOVE ending the last few days of vacation at a cushy Hyatt resort. Most recently, we visited the Andaz Costa Rica Resort on the Papagayo Peninsula and had a truly amazing time.
What’s your favorite World of Hyatt property? Do you have any other tips or tricks for making the most of you Hyatt points? Let us know!
Disclaimer: All photos used in this post were taken directly from the World of Hyatt or Chase website. None of these images are our own.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
In the rugged farmlands of northern Big Island, the Waipi’o Valley is nestled into the breathtaking coastline. A sacred personification of Hawaiian history and culture, this lush cliffside is known as the “Valley of the Kings”. The gorgeous lookout delivers some of the most stunning views on the island, and for those looking for a little extra adventure, the steep hike down into the valley will literally take your breath away. This valley quintessentially showcases the wonders of natural topographical Hawaiian beauty.
Big Island has a diverse array of climates and landscapes. The Waipi’o Valley is a must-visit gem as it celebrates both the beauty the Hawaiian islands are know for, as well as a the cultural significance of the land.
Life’s About the Climb
If you decide you want to get a closer view of the valley, there are three ways down the steep, 25% grade road. If you rented a four wheel drive vehicle (AWD, FWD, & RWD not permitted), you can tackle the descent and subsequent ascent by car. For those looking for a more unique experience, tours are available via horseback. It’s not uncommon to see horses in this area, so you will feel right at home with nature! For fit, able-bodied tourists, the climb down into the valley is possible by foot.
Oh the Places You’ll Go
If you’re driving or walking down yourself, you will come upon a fork in the road. Going to the left will lead you to a view of the staggering Hiilawe Falls. It’s important to note, you will be able to see the falls from afar, but it will not take you to the base of the falls. Be mindful wandering away from the paths. Private property does run adjacent to the areas you are walking or driving through.
If you take a right at the fork in the road, a muddy, dirt path will lead you to the Waipi’o Black Sand Beach. There are bathrooms at this beach but no lifeguard. This beach area is known to have a hefty undertow as well as some serious rip currents, so anyone less than a very experienced local surfer is highly encouraged to enjoy the water from the safety of the beach. From your perch on the beach, you can keep an eager eye out for dolphins and whales, as it’s not uncommon to see them in this area.
A bit more dependent on the recent weather, you may be able to see the Kaluahine Falls, if you’re up for a rocky walk over the boulders. These falls are in the cliffside under the lookout, so you have about a half mile or so to conquer to get there. The upside is that you’re accompanied by the jaw-dropping Hawaiian coastline the entire time.
Taking the Scenic Route
Looking for a scenic drive? The Hamakua Heritage Corridor begins in Hilo and winds its way up to the northern part of the island, ending at the Waipio Valley Lookout. Along the way and only a little out of the way, you’ll find the ‘Akaka Falls State Park. If it looks familiar, it’s because these falls were a backdrop in the widely acclaimed Jurassic Park movies!
Not far from the lookout is the Hamakua Harvest Farmers Market. If you are passing through on a Sunday from 9am to 2pm, this is a must-stop! A fantastic way to truly support the local economy while sampling locally sourced coconut milk gelato, spring rolls, smoked fish, and so much more!
Will Stop for Snacks
Nothing gets you hungry like taking in some spectacular views. On your way either to or from Hilo, you will drive past the best smoothie spot on the island: What’s Shakin’. I could not get enough of my Mango Tango, but truly all of their smoothies looked delicious.
The Tex Drive In is infamous for their malasadas— a Portuguese donut… think eclair meets beignet. Located in Honakaa, halfway between Waipi’o Valley Lookout and Hilo, this delicious little dessert is a perfect pre or post adventure snack.
If you’re planning on heading over to Kona via Waimea, the Big Island Brewhaus has beer, margaritas, and food. With a wide array of craft beers to choose from, this is the perfect stop to cool your jets after a strenuous hike.
Cliffside, Waterfalls, Volcanos… Oh My!
Big Island is home to a myriad of awe-inspiring wonders of nature. If you loved the lush cliffside of the Waipi’o Valley, you must head south to keep exploring. In a world above the clouds, Mauna Kea offers an unparalleled view of the stars. Even further south, the Hawaii Volcano National Park boasts endless stretches of rocky terrain. The natural beauty of this island is guaranteed to leave you wanting more.
written by McKenna
If you look up diva in the dictionary, you will find a picture of McKenna Lee. Loud-mouthed and overly opinionated she may have the biggest personality (read: attitude) of us all. McKenna is in college at FSU, but her passion lies in her small business Mack Swimwear and running her small group through church. She lives for days spent in a bathing suit, and tries to go surfing in every new beach town she visits.
Hawaii is home to some of the most amazing sunsets in the world, but Mauna Kea takes the cake for the best vantage point to gaze off into the horizon as the sun slowly sinks away. From a perch above the clouds, it’s truly a one-of-a-kind experience to feel like you’re standing in the on top of the world, above the clouds.
Differing from the classic beachfront Hawaii experience, a trip up to Mauna Kea will wow in a completely different fashion. Being at the summit of any mountain is a humbling feeling, but the cultural significance of Mauna Kea makes this adventure even more special.
Big Island is known for its biodiversity, and nothing showcases that like going from a sandy beach to a snowy mountain top in right around two hours. Throw a jacket in with your bathing suit and add Mauna Kea to your Big Island bucket list!
Visitor’s Information Center (VIS)
Cool your jets and acclimate to the altitude at a refreshing 9,200 feet. Mauna Kea is unique in that you can start your morning with your toes in the water and be almost 14,000 feet up in the air about two hours later. This is some serious elevation change for a body to accustom itself to, so if you’re planning on going all the way to the summit, a stop at the VIS is highly recommended to mitigate any potential altitude sickness.
Even if you do plan to go to the summit to watch the sunrise or sunset, the telescope viewing is done at the VIS. While you can see the stars well at the top, you may actually see them a bit better at the lower elevation as the decreased oxygen present at the summit can make your vision slightly less acute.
Jacket? Pack It!
Even in the summer months, it is cold at the top of Mauna Kea. While you don’t usually think of throwing a jacket in your luggage when you’re headed to Hawaii, if you’re planning on visiting Mauna Kea, bringing a jacket is a must! Keeping with the theme of warmth, you will want some closed-toe shoes and pants on as well. If you’re planning on being up there for a while or doing any amount of hiking around, a hat, sunglasses, sunscreen, a chapstick with SPF, extra water, and a snack are all highly recommended.
Getting to the Summit
Drive
For the bold, a 4WD or AWD vehicle is required to make the climb up the access road to the summit of the mountain. Before you embark up the steep leg from the VIS to the top, a ranger will check your car to ensure your car has the capacity to make it both up and down as well as the gas (at least ½ a tank). If you’re renting a car and are considering taking it to Mauna Kea, check with the rental car agency to ensure you are permitted to do so, as some specifically state they do not want their vehicles taken up to the summit.
Tour
If you prefer someone else do the driving, there are daily tours, which transport guests from their hotel in Hilo or Kona out to Mauna Kea. These tours usually include dinner, a parka and gloves to ensure warmth is a priority at the top of the mountain, and some guided star-gazing at the visitor’s center.
Hike
If you opt for the hiking option, know this is NOT recommended for casual, spur-of-the-moment hikers. The 12-13 mile round trip loop requires packing enough water (1-2 gallons) and sustenance for the 8 hour hike as well as appropriate layers. It is not uncommon to encounter winds or rain while making the trek.
The packing list for a hiker is a bit more comprehensive than the casual viewer. Consider also bringing a flashlight, compass, hiking poles, and aspirin (mild altitude sickness can result in a headache). Additionally, depending on the time of year, a dust mask may be helpful in the early morning hours to help pre-warm the air as you breathe. This can help reduce some of the burning-in-your-lungs sensation that can happen when hiking in cold, dry climates. Check the weather before you go!
Not For Everyone
The trek to the summit is not for everyone, even if you’re considering driving. Children under the age of 13 are affected more significantly by the changes in altitude and as such are discouraged from going. Additionally, pregnant women as well as individuals with any cardiac or respiratory health concerns should refrain from pursuing the higher altitude vantage point.
Most importantly, you should NOT plan on visiting Mauna Kea within 24 hours of scuba diving. The adaptations your body makes to tolerate the pressure changes whilst diving require time to acclimate before they can adjust again to tolerate the altitude of the mountain. You don’t want to end up with “the bends”!
Tacky Tourist
Mauna Kea, in particular the summit, is considered a very holy place. At the top of the mountain there is a “true summit” area, and it is extremely disrespectful to go wandering over to this region of the summit. This summit area is set apart from the general area that tourists gather, but there is not much signage warning wandering tourists away. To avoid making this mistake, know this “true summit” area is the first hilltop you see to your right as you reach the top of the mountain. It has a small altar-like structure, you can see from afar.
In this same vein, trail etiquette is above averagely important if you elect to do any hiking. Do not go wandering off the trail and largely try to leave your footprint on this volcanic mountain as small as possible.
Bye Bye Baby
After the sun has set, rangers usher everyone back down the mountain as the cars’ headlights can negatively affect the telescopes’ performance. On the way down, there are three parking lots you can pull into. These are useful for a few reasons. First and foremost, the descent is steep, so you will be giving your breaks a workout. Allowing them to cool down in a parking lot for a few minutes is highly encouraged. This brake cool-down break is the perfect opportunity to lay down on the ground and look up at the stars. There is no light pollution, and it is a breathtaking view on a clear night.
Did You Know
Mauna Kea towers 13,796 feet above sea level; however, it is actually, the tallest mountain on the planet. While it’s height is certainly impressive, at just under 14,000 feet, one might mistakenly assume it’s not even the tallest mountain in North America. This isn’t wrong per se, but it does discount where Mauna Kea sets her roots. The 13,796 feet above sea level is truly just the tip of the iceberg as she stretches another 18,900 to reach the ocean floor. When you consider the height in total, Mauna Kea is a staggering 32,696 feet tall!
Onto Your Next Great Adventure
If you loved the volcanic mountain that is Mauna Kea, Hawaii Volcano National Park is the next must visit stop on your Big Island road trip. Big Island is comprised of six volcanoes, but Kīlauea is the only one that is intermittently active. Definitely worth checking out, but especially if she is currently erupting!
written by McKenna
If you look up diva in the dictionary, you will find a picture of McKenna Lee. Loud-mouthed and overly opinionated she may have the biggest personality (read: attitude) of us all. McKenna is in college at FSU, but her passion lies in her small business Mack Swimwear and running her small group through church. She lives for days spent in a bathing suit, and tries to go surfing in every new beach town she visits.
At the very tip of Florida a small archipelago called the Florida Keys stretches out into the abyss where the Gulf of Mexico meets the Atlantic Ocean. At the end of this stretch lies Key West… a small island where the sun is always hot, the drinks are always cold, and the beach is always beautiful. In Key West, you’re always on island time!
Whether you’re visiting Key West with your honey, your favorite bachelorette, or your rowdy family, you’re going to love the laid back beach town vibe Key West emotes, with its unique conch-style houses, beautiful coral reefs, and sandy beaches. You might just have to indulge in a classic Key West Rum Runner if you’re feeling a little extra frisky!
Below we have detailed out favorite places to grab a bite, the best happy hour sports in town, and all the most adventurous ways to spend your day exploring Key West.
GOOD EATS
Blue Heaven
If you’re looking for an oasis in the middle of a bustling paradise, Blue Heaven is the groovy restaurant and bar you’re looking for. Not only will you LOVE the food, but live music makes your dining experience dinner and a show. Vibe check? Cool vibes only!
Sloppy Joe’s
Looking for some long lasting fun while you enjoy a good meal? Sloppy Joe’s features live music and a dance floor to boot— this restaurant is a little slice of Nashville down in the tip of Florida.
Seaside Cafe at the Mansion
Whether you’re planning on eating or drinking, you cannot go wrong at the Seaside Cafe. The food is delicious and the mojitos are refreshing… what more could you want?! An amazing view? The ocean is just a stone’s throw away. Such a lovely cafe with a delightfully fun atmosphere!
Mattheessen’s
There’s no such thing as a cookie that’s too big, and Mattheessen’s proves this with their amazing half-pound cookies. Your self-control will not be able to resist stopping in one of their two locations… both are on Duval street, so you can’t miss it! If cookies don’t tempt you, they also sell fudge, macaroons, key lime pie, and ice cream. It’s Florida, so no matter how cold it is elsewhere, it’s always ice cream weather in Key West.
Margaritaville
Can you go to Key West and not stop into Margaritaville for a drink? Channel your inner Jimmy Buffet and order yourself a margarita— or two piña coladas… one for each hand! We enjoyed all our food there as well!
SO MUCH TO DO, SO LITTLE TIME
Key West Butterfly and Nature Conservatory
There’s something breathtaking about the ethereal beauty of a butterfly. At the Key West Butterfly and Nature Conservatory, you will feel like a Disney princess come to life as you wander through the lush, tropical garden with hundreds of butterflies.
SouthernMost Point
The large landmark buoy is a hallmark visit during any Key West trip. If you are this far south in the country, you must visit the southernmost point in the continental United States!
FYI: Depending on the time of year, you may wait in line for this photo.
Dry Tortuga National Park
Every day the Yankee Freedom departs from Key West at 7:30 am and heads out to Fort Jefferson in the Dry Tortugas National Park. It takes just over two hours to reach the island from Key West.
Once there, you will be able to swim, lounge on the beach, walk around and through the fort, take a guided tour, and snorkel (snorkeling gear included in the cost ticket). The water is crystal clear and truly perfect for snorkeling. If you keep an eye out while walking the perimeter of the fort, you may find some beautiful pieces of sea glass as well— a charming memento of a gorgeous place. Adventurers spend five to six hours on the island, so the trip lasts about ten hours in total.
As a note: While we actually have not taken this cruise, we have sailed down to Fort Jefferson in the Dry Tortugas from our hometown in Fort Myers, FL. We would see the Yankee Freedom arrive and depart every day throughout our stay, and we are well versed in all the beauty waiting to be discovered on this small island. The starkly clear water, beautiful snorkeling, and immense calm of endless blue are incredible and certainly worth taking the day to see!
High Stakes Charters
If you’ve never been deep sea fishing, Key West is the place to do it, and High Stakes Charters is the group to do it with! Whether you’re in Key West for a family vacation or a bachelor party, this is an amazing time for all ages. Any boat day is a good day, but a boat day offshore fishing is one you’ll never forget!
Mallory Square
At the north end of Duval street, the road ends and you will find Mallory Square. This is THE spot to watch the sunset in Key West. A couple hours before sunset, a sunset celebration commences. This daily ritual includes a wide array of performers and vendors that entertain while others wait for the sun to go down. Live music and a stunt show of sorts are almost guaranteed.
Fort Zachary Taylor Historic State Park
The perfect combination of historic fortitude meets beautiful Florida beaches lies at the Fort Zachary Taylor Historic State Park. There’s something to do for everyone in the family! History buffs can wander throughout the fort, while outdoor enthusiasts have a wide array of activities to choose from: biking, fishing, bird-watching, hiking, paddling, scuba diving, snorkeling, and swimming. At the end of the day, this is also a beautiful spot to watch the sunset.
THE HAPPIEST HOURS
If you enjoy a cold, refreshing beverage of choice, you will have endless options to choose from. These are a few that we found with some above average happy hour specials. Enjoy!
Pepe’s Cafe
The only thing better than a fresh-squeezed margarita is a $6 fresh squeezed margarita. Pepe’s Cafe also does half off oysters for their happy hour. Their breakfast spread is also notoriously delicious!
Happy Hour: 4-6 p.m.
First Flight Island Restaurant & Brewery
First Flight Island Restaurant & Brewery has some historical roots as it is housed in the birthplace of Pan American World Airways… Pan-Am’s first tickets were sold out of this very building in 1927! These days, you can enjoy half off their house drafts as well as some finger-lickin’ plates.
Happy Hour: 4-6 p.m.
Hank’s Hair of the Dog Saloon
What’s better than one happy hour? TWO! Hank’s Hair of the Dog Saloon has a brunch happy hour to help get the party started. You can indulge in some two-for-one mimosa’s or perhaps kick your hangover to the curb with a couple bloody mary’s. Afternoon happy hour is pretty standard, but they have live music playing throughout the afternoon and into the evening.
Happy Hour: 11am-2pm & 4pm to 7pm
The Roost
The understated vintage charm of The Roost will leave you feeling glad you wandered a bit from the touristy chaos of duval street. This specialty cocktail bar is guaranteed to deliver something a step above the rest.
Happy Hour: 3-6 pm
Bonus Round
If you are driving down to Key West, stop by Robbie’s to feed the tarpon!! These massive fish will leap out of the water to eat bait fish right out of your hand. The experience is exhilarating and just a little frightening.
Robbie’s is on Islamorada (about halfway down the Florida Keys archipelago), so it makes for a perfect mid-drive pit stop!
We hope you have the best time enjoying your relaxing Key West vacation. From Duval Street to the Dry Tortugas, so many adventures await (don’t forget to pack your sunscreen)! A Rum Runner is the official drink of Key West, so be sure to try at least one while you’re there… cheers!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Despite the state of Oregon being a cornucopia of etherial, natural beauty, it is home to only one national park: Crater Lake. Approximately 7,700 years ago, the 12,000-foot-tall volcano known as Mount Mazama erupted and collapsed, forming the 1,943 foot deep Crater Lake. This is the deepest lake in America! Crater Lake has become renown for its beautiful, illustrious blue color, as the lake’s water comes directly from snow or rain, making it one of the cleanest and clearest lakes in the world. Teeming with wilderness adventures year-round, a visit to Crater Lake is a must!
RIM DRIVE
The Rim Drive stretches in a 33 mile loop, encircling Crater Lake. It boasts 30 overlooks, with each highlighting a different view of the lake, a remarkable geologic formation, or a noteworthy environmental feature.
While some of these stops have exhibits with information about the view, most of the pullouts do not have signage… just hypnotizing views with hundreds of shades of blue. Definitely leave yourself lots of time to drive around, because it’s rather hard not to stop at every pullout along the way!
ADVENTURES AWAIT
Summer/Fall
Lake Tour
This tour is a two-hour cruise. During this time, guests will circle the perimeter of the lake, affording up-close views of Wizard Island, Phantom Ship, and the sparkling depths of the lake itself. As the beautiful views abound, a ranger will share information about the Crater Lake’s history, geology, and culture.
The tour starts at the Cleetwood Cove Boat Dock on the north side of Crater Lake. To access the dock visitors must to hike the Cleetwood Cove Trail, one of the park’s steepest trails. The trail is 1.1 miles long and has a 700-foot elevation change.
There are two species of fish that live in Crater Lake: Kokanee salmon and rainbow trout. These fish are actually not native to the lake, so visitors are encouraged to fish. You don’t need a license and there’s no limit on how much you catch!
Visitors may fish along the shoreline any time, as permitted by the weather. The shoreline is reached via the 1.1-mile Cleetwood Trail.
Important to note: fishermen and women must use artificial bait, so as to not inadvertently introduce an outside species to the lake.
Hiking
While there are no hiking trails that encircle the lake, there are 16 day-hike trails in addition to five longer backcountry hikes. The hikes are stratified in categories of easy, moderate, and strenuous to ensure hikers of all fitness levels are equipped for outdoor adventure.
The Pacific Crest Trail (PCT) stretches 2,650 miles from Mexico up to Canada, and a portion of this trek crosses through Crater Lake National Park. The main trail primarily stays on the outskirts of the park, so you would only really find this trail if you were looking for it.
Winter/Spring
Skiing
The park features a variety of marked and unmarked routes for bold cross-country skiers. Adventure enthusiasts can choose a route through forests, along West Rim Drive, or to Vidae Falls along the East Rim Drive.
Crater Lake provides a park newspaper that provides an annual update on ski trails. Certainly worth checking out as you plan your wintery adventure.
While no ski equipment rental is available in the park, it can be rented along the way as you drive in. Call Waldron’s in Roseburg, OR at 541. 672. 8992 or Blackbird in Medford, OR at 541. 779. 5431 (Blackbird pricing available here) to reserve a pair of skis.
SnowShoeing
Never been snowshoeing before? New to Crater Lake? Trek through the snow with a Park Ranger and enjoy an off-trail exploration through the snowy forests and meadows along the rim of Crater Lake.
No previous snowshoeing experience is necessary. The snowshoes are provided free of charge, and there is no cost for the tour (besides the cost of admission into the park).
These tours are available Saturdays and Sundays, December through April. Advance reservations are required. For more information or to sign up, you can call the park’s visitor center at 541. 594. 3100.
even in the middle of July, there’s snow on the ground!
PLANNING YOUR VISIT
When to Come
Generally speaking, the best months to visit Crater Lake are July, August, and September. Even in these summer months, you will see snow on the ground. If you’re planning to be in Oregon in October or June, you may want to check out the Crater Lake operations or alerts pages to ensure the roads are open. This part of Oregon receives an annual average of 42 feet of snow, so the Rim Drive roads are seasonally closed for the winter season.
Visitor’s Center
Crater Lake maintains not one, but two visitor centers. The Steel Visitor Center is open year-round, whereas the Rim Visitor Center is only open in the summer months (May 22-October 31st). In 2021, the Rim Visitor Center was temporarily closed down due to COVID. Additionally, the Steel Visitor Center will also be closed through the end of 2022, to complete renovations to the building structure.
SLEEPS
Crater Lake Lodge
Open mid-May to mid-October, the Crater Lake Lodge boasts 71 rooms, in a picturesque chalet overlooking Crater Lake. Pets are not permitted. To make a reservation, you can either call (866) 292-6720 or do so online.
The Cabins at Mazama Village
Seven miles south of Rim Village, you’ll find Mazama Village with 40 cabin units available for visitors. They are open late May to late September. Pets are not permitted. To make a reservation, you can call (866) 292-6720 or do so online.
Mazama Campground
The Mazama Campground has 214 sites available for tents and RVs (50’ maximum). There are some electric hookups available for RVs. Campsite amenities include restrooms, potable water, a gas station, food storage lockers, and a dump station. This campground is open early June to late September. To make a reservation, you can either call (541) 594-2255 ext. 3 or do so online.
DOGGOS
Pets on leash are allowed on paved roads and parking lots that are free of significant snow. Leashes must be no more than 6 feet in length, and only one pet per walker is allowed.
Areas to Walk in Summer and Fall
The 1/4-mile paved promenade at Rim Village (excellent views here!)
Through the campground loops at Mazama Village.
The following trails: Godfrey Glen Trail, The Lady of the Woods Trail, The Grayback Drive, and The Pacific Crest Trail (note: these trails do not offer any views of the lake).
Areas to Walk in Winter and Spring
Throughout these seasons, the most popular place to walk a dog is the Rim Village parking lot.
Pets are allowed only on one park trail: the Pacific Crest Trail, which is open to cross-country skiing and snowshoeing. The Pacific Crest Trail is open year-round to pets, whether it is covered by snow or not.
Pets are not allowed on other park trails, off-trail, or on unplowed roads. They are also not allowed inside park buildings, including Crater Lake Lodge and the Mazama Village Cabins. Service animals are exempt from these regulations. Service dogs are allowed on park trails and also on boat tours.
GOOD EATS
Whether you’re looking to grab a snack for your hike or to rest your weary legs while you eat, you have a few different options for chowing down while you’re visiting Crater Lake. With three restaurants and a general store, all your bases will be covered. Hours do vary based on time of year, so check here to ensure you’ll be able to properly fill your belly (or your car!).
Rim Village Café
This spot in the southwest rim of the lake serves grab-and-go salads and sandwiches.
Annie Creek Restaurant
This restaurant can be found in Mazama Village, near the Annie Spring entrance to the park. They sell grab-and-go sandwiches and salads for lunch, but they also serve pizza, burgers, and other entrees for dinner.
Crater Lake Lodge Dining Room
Crater Lake Lodge offers casual dining with a lake-view setting. Due to the restrictions brought on by the COVID-19 pandemic, meals at the Lodge are currently only available for Lodge guests.
Mazama Village Store
This general store sells groceries, camping supplies, firewood, and gasoline.
ENTRANCE FEES & PASSES
Pass Type
Summer Cost*
Winter Cost*
Single Vehicle Fee
(Grants unlimited entry for one vehicle for 7 consecutive days— aka keep your receipt if you plan to come back!)
* Summer is May 22nd-October 31st. Winter is November 1st-May 21st.
We hope you have a lovely time taking in this gorgeous reflection of nature’s beauty. If you are exploring the national parks throughout the Pacific North West, be sure to check out Mount Rainier next!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Excited to spend 7 days exploring Kauai? Between the five of us sisters, we’ve visited a handful of times, and throughout our explorations, we’ve curated the perfect itinerary. From can’t miss sights to splurge-worthy treats to niched local stops, our one week itinerary is the perfect way to maximize your time on Kauai.
Kauai, fondly referred to as the Garden Island, is a lush, tropical haven, with breathtaking views everywhere you look. If you live for outdoor adventures, the bounty of nature’s beauty, and delicious local snacks, we have the perfect week long agenda for you. From the Nāpali Coast to Shipwreck Beach, your seven day jaunt in Kauai will fly by in a whirlwind of beauty.
If you’re looking for staggering feats of nature and abounding luscious landscapes, Kauai should be at the top of your travel bucket list. That being said, you will not find extensive nightlife or high-end shopping here. Kauai is not immune to the reflections of tourism; however, Kauai is inviting to visitors so enthralled by her natural beauty, the tawdry of mainstream tourism isn’t found here.
Despite Kauai being relatively small, there is no circumferential road around the island. This is due to the immense topography of the northwest region. Efforts have been made in the past to try and connect the loop, but they have all been in vain. Some areas are just meant to remain untouched! While this might mean a little extra driving time, the views in Kauai are nothing short of spectacular, so get excited for a little extra time in the car taking in the scenery.
You wouldn’t have amazing canyons, emerald cliff coastlines, and astounding waterfalls without the terrain Kauai is known for. The island is our favorite because of its rugged charm, not in spite of! At the end of the week, you’ll already be trying to plan your next trip back!
DAY ONE
Depending on when you arrive, your first day isn’t usually a full first day. Once your wheels touch down, grab your bags and scoot on out of the airport. Where to first? We’re headed to the southern part of the island to start our adventure… but first coffee!
The Aloha Roastery is pretty close to the airport and makes for a nice pick-me up, especially if you’re feeling a little jet-lagged. They do close at 3pm though, so don’t plan on stopping by day one if you have a later afternoon or evening flight.
The Ninini Point Lighthouse is a simple, peaceful stop, with a beach access point close by. It makes for a nice day-one sunset view, with your toes in the water.
You can’t go wrong with dinner at Duke’s Barefoot Bar. You get both a view of the beach AND tasty food (shoutout to the tasty tacos)!
Unless you’re island hopping to Kauai from elsewhere in the archipelago, it’s not a bad idea to plan for an early bedtime, because chances are, you’re going to be tired.
Jet-lag pro tip: If you’re worried about jet-lag affecting your sleep/wake cycles, it’s never a bad idea to take a Zquil before bed to help make sure you don’t wake up at 2am ready to start your day. Not for everyone but sometimes it’s a helpful travel tip.
DAY TWO
Salty Air, Wind in Your Hair
Nothing like starting the day with a nice little walk or run. The fresh air on Kauai is the perfect kick-start to get you going, but if you need a little more oomph, Little Fish Coffee Co. has coffee and all kinds of breakfast goodies to start the day off right. The lines will be long in the 8 o’clock to 9 o’clock hours, so plan to swing by earlier rather than later. The food and drinks are really good though, so they’re worth waiting in a bit of a line for.
If you’re looking for max Hawaii vibes, you can take your breakfast on the less-than-10-minute walk down to the beach, to enjoy with your toes in the sand.
Next up Poipu Beach! Stop by Spouting Horn on your way there to check out a unique oceanic plume. We wouldn’t necessarily recommend largely driving out of your way to see it, but it’s a fun 10-15 minute stop to check out.
What is a Hawaiian vacation without big chillin’ on the beach?? Bring a book and your sunnies and just take in paradise on Poipu Beach. Rather unique, this beach has a small sandbar island not too far out from the sand. The tide can affect how safe it is to venture out to this little adventure point, so check with the lifeguard before you head out!
Once you’ve sufficiently enjoyed the beach bum life for a couple hours, head on over to Makauwahi Cave to check out this historic sinkhole area. As a plus, there’s a tortoise sanctuary nearby. Some of the turtles were relocated to the sanctuary because they outlived their original owner!
Kauai… The Snack Island
On to Old Kōloa Town for some food! You have options! We bought a couple different things and split them, which is, in our opinion, the best way to go. Koloa Fishmarket sells some delicious poke (a traditional Hawaiian cuisine). Perfect to fill you up if you’re hungry from your morning adventures. Shaved ice is also popular in Hawaii and we LOVEDThe Fresh Shave! The PERFECT treat on a warm day. We recommend the coconut pineapple one!! After your belly is full, Old Kōloa Town has some fun shops to wander around and check out.
If you have any interest in coffee, the Kauai Coffee Co should be your next stop! They have a free self-guided walking tour that is pretty interesting— especially if you don’t know much about the process that goes into coffee making.
What pairs better with coffee than chocolate? Your next stop should be the Kauai Chocolate Company. If you love a tasty chocolate snack, they have chocolate for you!
To finish a full day with a full meal, head to Da Crack for some amazing Mexican food. Large, reasonably priced bowls will hit the spot. With your belly full, there’s nothing left to do but hit the hay.
A couple notes:
Kauai is not known to have much of a nightlife scene, so if you go to bed early, you won’t be missing out on much.
When you’re driving around on Maluhia Road, there’s a one mile stretch of overarching eucalyptus trees that have grown together, to make the Tree Tunnel. Keep your eyes peeled… if you don’t know what you’re looking for, you could drive right through it, without realizing it!
DAY THREE
Breakfast options for every kind of morning person. If you need a little kickstart to get you moving in the morning, head to the Eden Coffee food truck in Old Kōloa. A fantastic cup of coffee to start your day! If you rise with the sun and are looking for something a bit more refreshing, stop by Kauai Juice Co. It’s so hard to pick a juice with all their tasty combinations, but I can personally shout-out the Akala… it’s I-could-drink-five-no-problem delicious.
Shipwreck Beach
Shipwreck Beach has it all… sand, waves, hiking, and cliff jumping! The Maha’ulepu Heritage Trail starts near Shipwreck Beach, so if you’re the hiking type, you can start your day with this beautifully scenic hike. It clocks in at just under 4 miles— the perfect morning walk distance. It’s a lovely way to combine a little morning exercise with Hawaii coastline views.
When you’re ready to cool off, you can do it with big style points by cliff diving down into the ocean from a cliff mere steps from the beach. Time of year can affect the conditions of the water, so jump carefully, but generally speaking, this is one of the most popular cliff diving spots on Kauai.
Once you’ve settled down from your adrenaline rush, you can take a fat nap on the beach. There’s nothing like drifting off to the sound of waves.
If you visit Shipwreck in the winter, it’s not terribly uncommon to spot whales from the shore. Be sure to keep your eyes peeled!!
Nāpali Coast Views
For a late afternoon and early evening adventure, throw on your cutest I-don’t-mind-if-this-gets-a-little-wet outfit and get excited for the best views of your trip. The Nāpali Coast is breathtaking and simply must be taken in. There are a few companies that offer Nāpali Coast tours, and while I am sure the view is stunning from any boat, we were rather impressed with Captain Andy’s sunset tour. The Nāpali Coast is the crown jewel of natural beauty in Kauai, so this is a must-do when you’re visit. The open bar doesn’t hurt either. Options include a sneaky tiki cocktail, a couple white and red wines, and some assorted canned beers. Worth every penny!!
If you find you went hard on the open bar during your sunset cruise, everyone can grab some appetizers and all but the designated driver can enjoy some libations at the Kauai Island Brewing Company. The garlic fries were good, but especially delicious with some guava ketchup.
DAY FOUR
Waimea Canyon
Exploring Waimea Canyon, fondly referred to as the Grand Canyon of the Pacific, is the mission objective for day four. Before you hit the road to head out there, you won’t regret stopping by Kalaheo Cafe and Coffee Co. Not only was their coffee good, but they had some excellent gluten free options…. if you eat carrot cake for breakfast, can you call it a carrot muffin??
When you arrive at Waimea Canyon, we recommend you drive all the way to the Pu’u o Kila Lookout. We found it was a bit easier to drive to the end and stop at various lookouts (the Kalalau Lookout is a must-stop!) as you back-track. Your camera is not ready for all the action it’s about to get.
We had hoped to hike the Awa’awapuhi Trail, and if a 6 miles hike is up your alley, it looks like the view is certainly worth the hike. The weather at the higher elevation was a little rainy when we visited, so we backtracked all the way to 6b on the map (red arrow) and took the Cliff Trail to Canyon trail to find a mystical waterfall. Really beautiful for a plan B hike.
Good Eats
When your camera is chock-a-block full with pictures, and you feel the views of Waimea canyon are sufficiently immortalized in your brain forever, it’s time to head to the farmer’s market in Waimea. Don’t leave until you’ve tasted some Li Hing dried mango (Li Hing means it’s been dusted with some plum powder)! I now understand the term “nature’s candy”.
A firm believer that there’s not such a thing as too many treats, a stop by Jojo’s Shave Ice will be the perfect final stop before you hit the road. We’re not saying Berry Berry is the best one, but we’re not, not saying it either.
Once your legs are tuckered out, and your car is full of snacks, get ready for the drive up to Princeville. It should take about 2 hours to get from Waimea Canyon to Princeville, on the northern side of the island. When you arrive into town, head to Hideaways Pizza Pub for a slice of ‘za’. Their salads are good too! One of the only places to find pizza in Princeville, this restaurant also maintains later hours if you happen to roll into town a bit later.
As a note: You’ll want to bring a rain jacket or windbreaker when you’re in Waimea Canyon. It can get chilly up at higher elevation, and it’s not uncommon for transient light rains to roll through.
DAY FIVE
Start your day with breakfast at The Spot with their mouth-watering assortment of breakfast bowls. A great way to power start your day!
Ha’ena State Park
Once you have been filled with sustenance, throw on your bathing suit and head to Ha’ena State Park. The drive here may take a bit longer than anticipated due to one way bridges and island time pace of life, so don’t let this surprise you. Once you’re there, you won’t have to wander far to find Ke’e beach. If you’re not looking for back-to-back hiking adventure days, this is a choose your own adventure kind of park. Chilling on the beach is a definite option.
If you’re looking to muddy your boots, wander on over to the Kalalau Trail. The trail goes for 22 miles and you do need additional permits if you plan to hike farther than about 4 miles out, but if you go 2 miles into the trail, you will find a second, even more beautiful beach (pictured below)! The hike does get a bit muddy, but the views along the way make it WELL worth it.
Once you’re back at Ke’e Beach, there are showers and hoses you can use to return your shoes to their original color. While the nature scenes are picturesque, the cell service is spotty. If your group decides to split up, ensure you have a plan for when and where you plan to meet back up.
Just Keep Swimming
Snorkeling is the next ocean exploration on the list. For this, you head to Tunnels Beach. In order to get here, park at Ha’ena Beach (this is a different spot than Ha’ena State Park) and enjoy the ten minute walk to Tunnels Beach. You pass the Maniniholo Dry Cave on your way there, which is fun to check out. Once you’re at the beach, strap your snorkel on and get to swimming!
If you’re not too pooped, wander on over to Hanalei Bay next. There’s lots of shops to explore. There’s the usual tourist traps you’d expect, but there’s some local artists worth checking out as well. Not to mention lots of tasty looking dinner options. We chowed down at Chicken in a Barrel, and we can confirm it was finger-licking good.
On your way home, drive by the Wai’oli Hui’ia Church. Not necessarily something you need to get out of the car for, but it’s charming to see.
Important note: If you plan on visiting Ha’ena State Park, they currently require you to have a permit for the day and window of time you wish to visit. We recommend you set a reminder on your phone for exactly one month prior to the day you plan on going, so you can ensure you are able to purchase passes. They can be found here.
DAY SIX
Power Start
Vibe check for the last full day in Kauai? A little bit of everything! Start your day at Queens Bath to explore this tidal pool surrounded by igneous rock. Mentally prepare yourself to get a little or a lot muddy, but the view is powerfully beautiful. Beware! This spot can be a little dangerous in the more wintery months, so if there’s any signs warning you not to venture this way, it’s likely in your best interest to head their warnings.
For some breakfast and beach snacks, Healthy Hut Market and Cafe is your next stop. The cafe sells all sorts of tasty smoothies and juices, but they also sell groceries as well. I would liken it to a local Whole Foods. If you end up starting your day a bit late and it’s closer to lunchtime by the time you’re in Kilauea, Paco’s Tacos is right next door to Healthy Nut and is also a delectable stop.
Secret Beach
Kauapea Beach or Secret Beach is an amazing, not-terribly-secret spot 10-15 minutes east of Princeville. This beach features some fantastic views as well as some fun tide pools to see crabs and small fish in. Full disclosure, the short but steep path to this beach is best suited for able bodied persons. Some people have difficulty finding the trailhead, but this should help. The things that make it harder to access help keep this spot a bit more secluded. While there’s much to enjoy here, this is not a recommended spot for swimmers. The surf can get pretty rough, and there’s no lifeguard on duty here.
Sweet Sunset
What to do for your last night in Hawaii? One last beach experience, taking in your final Hawaii sunset at the Hanalei Pier. Once the image has been sufficiently saved into your memory forever, head to Ama Restaurant for oodles of noodles. Also, if you haven’t had a Mai Tai yet, this is a must as it is the classic Hawaiian cocktail! The ramen is delicious and if you make it there before the sunlight slips away completely, the views are perfect for a last night spot.
DAY SEVEN
Saving the Best for Last
Departure day has arrived, but do not dismay! Depending on when your flight is, you just might have time to sneak in one last lifelong memory. Since you will already need to drive back down to Lihue, arrive a couple hours early and do the Big Kahuna Kauai Air Tour with Air Ventures. With only six passengers per plane, no middle seats, and an extra large viewing window for everyone aboard, this hour long flight is the perfect way to reflect on the week you just had, while taking the whole island in one last time.
As a note: If you are renting a Turo or car that requires a pre-return cleaning, check out Sudz Car Wash in Lihue. They offer a reasonably priced exterior wash as well as quick do-it-yourself vacuums to make a quick cleaning job easy.
The Nitty Gritty of Paradise City
Transportation
We used this Turo (Turo is a service similar to Airbnb, except for cars) for our wheels. We rather enjoyed having a truck, because the bed afforded us abundant space for luggage. Plus we felt a bit more like locals in this ride.
Sleeps
Southern Kauai: This Airbnb was centrally located as was a perfect spot for three of us to comfortably share. They provided beach gear, which was super convenient.
Northern Kauai: We stayed at this Airbnb in Princeville, and we were also pleased with how close we were to everything. They also provided beach and snorkel gear, which was clutch— especially since we’d planned to go snorkeling at Tunnels beach.
A Word to the Wise
The north side of the island was far rainier than the south when we visited, so definitely don’t forget to pack a rain jacket. If you’re not big on toughing it out in the rain, you might want to consider a large portion, if not all of your stay being on the souther region of Kauai. This week-long agenda was mapped out to best hit all the best highlights for a week-long stay, but one’s deference to the weather must be accounted for when planning. That being said, even if your hotel/Airbnb is in the south, the Kalalau Trail at Ha’ena State Park is worth driving up and enduring a bit of muddiness for.
The farmers market scene in Kauai is definitely worth checking out— especially if it’s Saturday! If you see a farmer’s market while you’re driving around, I promise you won’t regret stopping.
If you’re island hopping to Big Island, be sure to check out Hawai’i Volcano National Park. It’s a completely different topography than that of Kauai, but amazingly beautiful nonetheless!
written by Kayla
A literal life saving queen, Kayla Grace is an Army nurse in Tacoma, Washington. When she’s not fixing up tiny humans on the peds floor, she is likely to be found running, walking, or hiking outside— or crushing a home improvement project, as she has very recently purchased her first home! Since moving to Washington, Kayla has maintained a plant-based diet— a feat largely unattainable by any other sister, but she makes it look *almost* possible with her I-can’t-believe-these-are-vegan chocolate chip cookies.
The Hawai’i Volcano National Park (HVNP) is a breathtaking display of the power a volcano holds within. If you are planning a trip to Big Island, a visit to HVNP is a must! You will be blown away by the diverse microbiomes waiting to be encountered. From lava craters, forests, to seemingly endless stretches of rocky terrain, to the picturesque coastline, everything in this park radiates the allure of nature.
The Hawai’i Volcano National Park is home to two unique volcanoes: Kīlauea, one of the world’s most active volcanoes, and Mauna Loa, the largest active volcano. Not only are these feats of nature impressive in size, they also represent a special part of Hawaiian culture. Kīlauea maintains a large crater at its summit named Halemaʻumaʻu, which is said to serve as the body and home of Pelehonuamea or Pele. Pele is regarded a Hawaiian volcano deity and respected as the creator of the volcanic landscapes that make up the Hawaiian archipelago.
Below we have detailed everything you need to know to make the most of your day in the park! From the best trails to the prettiest drives and all the tips and tricks in between to ensure you make the most of your very volcano day.
Scoot Your Boot This Way
When booking your rental vehicle for Big Island, some spots require four wheel drive, but you will not need it to visit the Hawai’i Volcano National Park! All roads in the park are two-wheel drive friendly, so you should be able to visit regardless your ride.
When you are planning your Big Island adventure, the two regions people tend to stay in are Hilo and Kailua-Kona. From Hilo, HVNP is about a 45 minute drive southwest via Highway 11. Departing from Kailua-Kona, the drive is a bit longer, clocking is at a little over 2 hours, taking Highway 11 southeast.
Visitor Center
When you arrive in the park, the visitor center should be your first stop. It functions as an excellent starting point to make a game plan, empty your bladder, and lather on the sunscreen. There are interactive maps and park rangers available to help direct you wherever you need to head.
Kīlauea Iki Trail
Next up? Continue along Crater Rim Drive and park near the Kīlauea Iki trail or the Thurston lava tube (Nāhuku). These areas are close to one another and easily walkable, so snag a parking spot wherever you can. The lava tube isn’t anything too crazy, but it’s worth checking out just to experience how dark it gets down there— plus it’s wild to think lava once rush through the underground tube you’re standing in.
Across the road from the lava tube is the beginning of the Kīlauea Iki trail, which will lead you down to the floor of the Kīlauea Iki Crater. As the name suggests, this trail takes you down into the Kīlauea Iki Crater, beware… if you make the 400 foot climb down into the crater, just remember you have to get back up! It doesn’t take long to wind your way down to the crater floor, and from there, the trail is marked with cairns, or small stone piles, to keep visitors on track.
Keanakākoʻi Overlook
Just putting your walking shoes to work, your next stop will be driving to the Crater Rim Drive trailhead and wandering out to the Keanakākoʻi Overlook. Not only does this perch provide a glimpse at the Keanakākoʻi Crater, but it affords a spectacular view of Kīlauea. Kīlauea is an active volcano that intermittently erupts, most recently from September 2021 to December 2022. While this view would be interesting any time, walking out to this viewpoint is a MUST when Kīlauea is erupting. How many erupting volcanoes are you going to see in one lifetime?!
Chain of Craters Road
In what seems like a world away, the 20 mile drive out to the southern sea cliffs is beyond scenic as the landscape changes drastically before your very eyes. From the jungle-esque tropics near the visitor’s center, to the endless span of volcanic rock, to the stunning blue of the ocean crashing into a wide swath southern coastline, the drive out to the Hōlei Sea Arch is its own delight.
Once you’re there, a short walk will take you to the Hōlei Sea Arch, serving as an example of both the ocean’s power and nature’s sculpting. The dynamic surf makes for a hypnotic view as the crashing waves slowly erode the southern coastline. Vastly differing from the desolate beauty of prolific lava-rock topography elsewhere in the park, the endlessness of the ocean offers a stark contrast to the seemingly ceaseless gray of the volcano. Being rather set apart from the more popular areas of the park, it’s easy to consider skipping a visit to the Hōlei Sea Arch, but you have to remember the drive itself is as amazing as the coastline views themselves.
Kīlauea Eruptions
Kīlauea is the youngest and most active volcano on the island of Hawaiʻi. This makes re-visiting the park from year to year a treat as the topography undergoes progressive changes due to the intermittent activity. Before you visit, it’s never a bad idea to check the eruption conditions… many visitors find themselves eager to see the etherial plumes of gas and steam by day and the eery lava glow after dark.
Man’s Best Friend
National parks are notoriously picky about dogs being allowed on the scene. Yes dogs are allowed in some areas throughout the park, as long as they are on a 6-foot leash. Pets are welcome…
In all parking areas and surrounding curbs (excluding Hilina Pali Road and Kulanaokuaiki Campground)
On Crater Rim Drive in areas open to vehicles
On Chain of Craters Road down to Puʻu Loa Petroglyphs
At the Nāmakanipaio Campground
On Mauna Loa Road (ccasionally referred to as “The Strip Road”)
On Highway 11
At Kīlauea Military Camp (on paved roads, parking areas, and at the picnic area)
Pets are unfortunately prohibited in all of the undeveloped areas of the park, including all designated wilderness and all front-country/backcountry trails.
If you are planning on taking your doggo with you, they will have the highly coveted honor of becoming a bark ranger of the Hawai’i Volcano National Park if their two-legged human friend stops by the Kīlauea Visitor Center with them.
Before You Go, You Gotta Know
Hawai’i Volcano National Park is generally on the rainier side of Big Island, so come prepared for precipitation. Even if the weather looks nice, it won’t hurt to throw a light rain jacket in your pack.
The weather can change in the blink of an eye. Pouring one minute and scorching hot the next. Be sure to wear sunscreen! If your fair-skinned, sunnies and a hat will be your friend.
You don’t need hiking boots to wander around, but you will want sturdy shoes. Especially if you plan to go on any longer hikes!
Expect limited parking. Many parking lots are full after 10 a.m. If there are active eruptions going on, this will only make the park more popular.
Speaking of eruptions, if you opt for some late afternoon hiking, consider sticking around until after dark. The park is gorgeous during the day, but the volcano takes on a whole new dimension of beauty, watching it erupt at night.
Hawai’i Volcano National Park Entrance Fees & Passes
Pass Type
Cost
Single Vehicle Fee
(Grants unlimited entry for one vehicle for 7 consecutive days— aka keep your receipt if you plan to come back!)
$30
Single Pedestrian or Bicycle
(Grants unlimited entry for 7 consecutive days)
$15
Single Motorcycle
(Grants unlimited entry for 7 consecutive days)
$25
Hawai’i Tri-Park Annual Pass
Can also be used at Haleakalā National Park and Puʻuhonua o Hōnaunau National Historical Park. (unlimited entry for one year to pass owner and passengers in the same car)
Entrance fees are waived for Martin Luther King Jr’s birthday, the first day of National Park Week, the one year anniversary of the Great American Outdoors Act, the National Park Service Birthday, the National Public Lands Day, and Veteran’s Day.
Onto Your Next Great Adventure
If you loved the volcanic landscape in the Hawai’i National Volcano Park, Mauna Kea is the next must visit stop on your Big Island road trip (our action-packed one week itinerary here). Big Island is comprised of six volcanoes, but Mauna Kea is both a volcano as well as the tallest mountain on Earth. Definitely worth checking out!
Note: To the best of our knowledge we tried to spell all Hawaiian names correctly, with their intended diacritics. We apologize for any slight inconsistencies or incorrect spellings.
written by McKenna
If you look up diva in the dictionary, you will find a picture of McKenna Lee. Loud-mouthed and overly opinionated she may have the biggest personality (read: attitude) of us all. McKenna is in college at FSU, but her passion lies in her small business Mack Swimwear and running her small group through church. She lives for days spent in a bathing suit, and tries to go surfing in every new beach town she visits.
In Bruges, Belgium, Old World Charm comes to life in its beautiful architecture and intricate canal system. Visitors of all ages will enjoy indulging in hand-crafted chocolates, while beer connoisseurs can also enjoy some of the best beers in the world. A culture-rich adventure awaits for any traveler looking to visit this quaint city, frozen in time.
Bruges is a fairy tale town come to life, with cobblestone streets and Renaissance architecture. Its unique intersection of historic roots meets modern tourism makes this Belgian town a must-visit for anyone keen to explore distinct pockets of European culture.
There’s sights to be seen, foods to be sampled, and moments of relaxation to be stolen. We’ve compiled our favorite 13 stops during out time in Bruges.
1. Wander through the City Center
Where better to start than in the heart of the city? In the city center, Bruges’s iconic Gothic architecture is on display for all to indulge upon. Bruges is known to be a city steeped in history, and the city center highlights its longstanding roots.
2. Climb The Belfry
The Belfry is a pinnacle of architectural beauty within in the city center. If you are up to the climb, you can tackle the 366 steps to the top of the Belfry and you will be rewarded in spades with the breathtaking view of the city.
3. Seek a peek at Jesus’s blood at the Basilica of the Holy Blood
In a fascinating tale, the Basilica of the Holy Blood purports to have acquired a vial of Jesus Christ’s blood, which they maintain on display. The basilica itself is an ornate personification of Catholic opulence, with multiple levels and daily worship offered. Entry to the Basilica to view the vial is free, and those that are interested in more background can enjoy the accompanying Museum and Treasury for only €2.50.
4. Float around with Boottochten Brugge
The best canal tour in Bruges!! Bruges has an amazing canal system throughout the city, and the Boottochten Brugge canal tour is the perfect way to take it all in from a nautical vantage point. The canal tour afford a whole new perspective on Brugge architecture and infrastructure.
5. Stop by Sanseveria Bagelsalon for a power breakfast.
You have to have a good breakfast to start the day off right, and Sanseveria Bagelsalon delivers a bagel sandwich that will be on your mind all day. A delicious, hearty breakfast! Not only is the food tasty, but the ambiance in this charming, vintage cafe makes it more than worth the stop.
6. A Belgian Waffle from Chez Albert?? Yes Please!
You can’t visit Belgium without trying a warm, fresh Belgian waffle from Chez Albert! With the delicious array of toppings, this could be your breakfast, or it could be your dessert… regardless of your choice, it’s guaranteed to be delicious! We originally thought we’d share a waffle, but quickly decided one would not be enough!
7. Warm Up at The Old Chocolate House
There are loads of beautiful chocolate shops in Brugge, but The Old Chocolate House sells the best hot chocolate! If there is even a hint of a fall chill in the air, lean into it and savor your new soon-to-be-favorite cup of cocoa.
8. See Your Chocolate Dreams Come to Life at Pralinette
If you can dream it, they can do it. Not only does Pralinette have the endless eye-catching assortment of delicious, artisan chocolate, but they also have impressive chocolate sculptures. We visited around Easter, and they had larger-than-life easter bunnies in the window and throughout the store. 10/10 would recommend visiting for both the tasty treats and the chocolate imagination!
9. Sample Some Tasty Treats at Chocolat de Julie
As if taste-testng chocolates could ever be a hassle! The assortment of chocolates at Chocolat de Julie were certainly eye-catching and made us want to sample them all. This chocolate shop is a little less popular with the tourists, so we found the prices of their tasty treats were a little less as well— but no less delicious!!
10. Relax for a Moment at Cafe Rose Red
Vibe check? Cool vibes only at Cafe Rose Red. This cafe bar is a little off the beaten track, but so worth tracking down, with its genuinely historic atmosphere and amazing selection of beers. You’ll know you’re at the right place when you see the roses hanging from the ceiling!
11. Explore all Three Floors of De Garre
Tucked down an easy-to-miss, narrow alley, you’ll find De Garre. This hidden gem will become quite popular throughout the day, as all three floors of this quaint, medieval-chic bar find themselves packed to the gills. Definitely worth tracking down to try their beers… especially if you consider yourself a beer savant. Their beers come with a couple nibbles of cheese— a perfect compliment!
12. Adventure Below Surface Level at Le Trappiste
Le Trappiste oozes character from every corner of its unique cellar bar. Guaranteed to have something you’re interested in with their awesome variety of beers on tap and loads more from across the world available in bottles. The underground bar feels a bit like a 21st century speakeasy with its posh vaulted ceilings while still maintaining the airs of a classic Belgian pub. The ambiance is as good as the beers!
13. Wind Down at Riesling & Pinot Wijnbar-Wijnshop
It’s a little off the main drag, but you simply must wander into the Riesling & Pinot Wijnbar-Wijnshop for a cute wine bar experience. It’s most peculiar how one glass of wine magically turns to three.
What’s in a Name?
Is it Brugge or Bruges? The answer is both! Dutch and French are the predominant languages spoken in Belgium (with some German as well), and Bruges is located in the Flanders or predominantly Dutch region of Belgium. The spelling is Brugge in Flemish/Dutch and Bruges in French as well as English.
Hop, Skip, & a Jump
Bruges is a little over 150 miles from Amsterdam, making it feasible to visit both cities in one trip. Amsterdam is a sister city… rich in historical architecture, with an equally pervasive canal system to explore and even more great beers to try. The easiest way to travel from Bruges to Amsterdam is typically by train, and the 3-4 hour ride (depending on the route), flies by. If you’re curious what Amsterdam has to offer, check out our blog post here.
written by Dana
CEO of being stubbornly independent, Dana lives to speak her mind as her feisty personality lends itself to her outspoken nature. Dana epitomizes the concept of “spending money on experiences, not things” as she is constantly complaining that she has nothing to wear, but ALWAYS has her next trip on the docket. Dana recently graduated from FSU, and has joining us big kids in the adult workforce. She works with our dad at Wherry Truck Lines, keeping all the good ‘ole boys in line.
When traveling some place new, a hotel can certainly be fun, but often times an Airbnb can provide a more niched cultural experience of the area— especially if your host enjoys providing local recommendations! We have curated a list of twelve lovely, unique Airbnbs in the Amsterdam area. All are close enough to the city center that guests should not have difficulty touring and cafe-wandering to their heart’s content. High quality selections only, as all Airbnbs detailed below have at least a 4.75 out of 5 overall rating, with at least 30 reviews. Truly the most authentic way to experience Amsterdam!
Sleeps: 3 comfortably [bedroom in bedroom can either be a king size bed or two singles + the couch converts to a sofa bed]
Notable features: hosted by superhost, bathroom has underfloor heating
Must be okay with: located one flight up from the street level on the first floor (US second floor); the main entrance and staircase are shared with the hosts/owners (but the guest suite is completely private)
Must be okay with: located between restaurants and across from a Blues Bar with live music, so you will have the late city and bar noises (host does provide earplugs); must be able to ascend a steep flight of stairs
Oh, yes please: store your luggage at the hotel associated with the complex if you arrive before check-in hours, weekly housekeeping for stays of 7 nights or more, washer and dryer, & 24-hour door staff
Gimme more, gimme more: superhost, penthouse apartment, fully equipped kitchen, store your luggage at the hotel associated with the complex if you arrive before check-in hours, weekly housekeeping for stays of 7 nights or more
Once you’ve locked in where you’re staying, it’s time to start planning what you’ll be doing when you’re not pouring over the fab view from your Airbnb. Amsterdam has so many different adventures awaiting— from museums to tulips to cafes, your days will be filled with all the beauty this corner of the Netherlands has to offer.
written by Dana
CEO of being stubbornly independent, Dana lives to speak her mind as her feisty personality lends itself to her outspoken nature. Dana epitomizes the concept of “spending money on experiences, not things” as she is constantly complaining that she has nothing to wear, but ALWAYS has her next trip on the docket. Dana is finishing up her final year at FSU this fall, but plans to jet-set off to Hawaii for a few months before joining us big kids in the adult workforce.
Wandering the streets of Amsterdam transports you to the Renaissance era with it’s poignant architecture, teeming with culture. From canals and cafes to museums and tulips, this historic city has a breathtaking adventure for everyone.
Rudi’s Original Stroopwafels
A stroopwafel is a delicious dutch treat, consisting of two wafer waffles, joined together with a thin layer of caramel. Rudi’s started making stroopwafels in 1978, and to this day they are still sold fresh, right out of the food truck. Easily accessible to anyone looking for a sweet treat, their truck can be found parked in the middle of the Albert Cuyp Market Amsterdam. They are widely regarded at the best stroopwafel in town! A must try!!
Neighborhood: De Pijp
The Carrousel
You think you’ve had a big pancake, but you’ve never been to The Carrousel! Their pannenkoeken is a pancake on steroids. Not having tasted a savory pancake before, we ordered the ham & cheese pannenkoeken (left plate in the picture), and found it was more like a pizza than any pancake we’ve ever had before— but delicious nonetheless. We also sampled their poffertjes (right plate in the picture), and rather enjoyed this fluffy dutch pastry. They were actually so tasty, we went back to The Carrousel a second time, just to enjoy them again.
Neighborhood: Centrum
De Koffieschenkerij
We happened along this cute bakery cafe while we were out walking around, and it was a delightful oasis. I’m not terribly picky when it comes to sweet treats, but Kayla is plant-based and gluten free, and she was delighted by their vegetarian, vegan, and gluten free options. We were drawn in by the quaint outside garden terrace, but the hipster chic ambiance inside and the cozy lofted attic make for all sorts of nooks and crannies to relax into. If you see it while you’re out, definitely stop in and enjoy a bite!
Neighborhood: Centrum
The Historic Heineken Brewery
The Heineken Brewery was founded in 1864 in Amsterdam. While production has outgrown the space over the years, the original building is now used for the Heineken Experience Museum. We are far from connoisseurs of beer; however, we found it rather interesting to learn more about such a widespread beer-drinking staple. The price of admission also includes two beers, which is the best way to end any tour!
Neighborhood: De Pijp
Van Stapele
Have you even been to a bakery that only sells a single kind of cookie? That’s the name of the game at the Van Stapele bakery. Their infamous cookie is made of a dark chocolate dough with a delicious white chocolate filling. It is cooked to perfection: crisp around the edges, but perfectly soft and gooey on the inside. Cookies are made throughout the day as they sell like hotcakes, so they are often warm when you get them. The cookies are packaged up in a cute little paper bag… so you can buy ten and carry around your afternoon snack with ease.
Neighborhood: Centrum
Rijksmuseum
Amsterdam is home to dozens of niched museums, but none so breathtaking as the Rijksmuseum. Great masters such as Rembrandt, Vermeer, and Van Gogh are housed in this pinnacle of art history. All are able to enjoy not just the art, but the story behind the art as all displays have an English translation.
Admission into the museum is free to those under 18 years old and €20 for adults. We recommend booking your tickets in advance online, as lines can become long. While the museum is open 9am to 5pm, we advise going as early as possible. Tourists and locals alike enjoy the rich culture living within the Rijksmuseum.
Neighborhood: Museum Quarter
Anne Frank House
Truly a historical landmark, the Anne Frank House is a testament to the strength of the human spirit in the midst of unimaginable horror.
We booked our tickets in advance, and recommend you do the same if you feel passionately about visiting. All tickets for the coming month become available every first Tuesday of the month. If you make a last minute decision to check it out, they release about 20% of the tickets on the day of, but you need to be on the website waiting to really have a chance at getting them. Tickets cost €14 for adults, €7 for children 10-17 years old, and €1 for children 9 years old and younger. As a note, the Anne Frank House Museum does not reschedule tickets or give refunds for any reason, regardless of it’s validity.
Neighborhood: Centrum
Red Light District
The Red Light District is a world of it’s own as red neon windows illuminate prostitutes acting as live action billboards to attract clients. While services rendered are certainly not of interest to everyone, it’s an intriguing cultural phenomenon— especially since this sex-culture so vastly differs from typical socials norms for prostitution.
Important to note, as a tourist, you should understand that this is not an environment to have your phone out snapping pictures of girls in the windows. If someone sees you, this is considered a violation of privacy, and your phone may be confiscated. Photographs of the district, shops, and cafes are allowed but just not of the alluring individuals vying for attention.
Neighborhood: Centrum
Fields of Tulips
If you plan to visit Amsterdam in the spring, the Keukenhof Tulip Garden is a MUST visit!!! Thousands and thousands of tulips cover the grounds of this gorgeous garden and make for a beautiful spring attraction.
If you are planning on visiting Europe and are considering stopping by Amsterdam on your travels, the Flower Forecast could be a good resource to keep you in the loop. Weather cycles can affect the blooms, so keep an eye out for prime blossoming!
There are restaurants on the premise of the gardens, but visitors are also allowed to bring their own food and drinks if you were hoping to have a fun garden-adjacent picnic moment (visitors are not permitted to stroll through the bulb fields).
Tickets for 2022 will only be available online. There is no sale of tickets at the entrance of the park. Tickets available for purchase here beginning in November 2021. Cost is €19 for adults, €9 for children 4-17 years old, and children three years old and younger are free. If you drive to the garden, parking will cost €6.
Neighborhood: Bollenstreek (about 25 miles outside the Amsterdam city centre)
Canal Boat Tour
Amsterdam is known for its canal labyrinth, and there’s nothing like riding in an open air boat to take in all the sights. Cruising through the canals is the perfect way to immerse yourself in a cultural experience. Perhaps a little touristy but delightfully enriching nonetheless. We love love loved Flagship Amsterdam’s small-group nautical canal exploration experience. The boat environment felt rather luxurious and Hans and Isabel (the best guides!) provided a warm, intimate tour, with all our various local inquires welcomed. Pricing varies according to which tour option you’re interested in and how long you wish to adventure around.
Neighborhood: Centrum
Brouwerij Troost
If you fancy yourself a craft beer savant, then visiting Troost Brewery is a must. Beers are quintessentially brewed for universal appeal, yet unique flavor profiles. With all organic beers— and even one gluten free, Troost is comprised of beer aficionados with a conscience. While they’re always concocting something new, they do maintain three regular beers on tap: their signature blond ale, the I.P.A., and a weizen. Their palatable array of beers is guaranteed to hit the spot— for even the most discerning hophead.
Neighborhood: De Pijp
Oliebollen
This is less of a specific locale recommendation and more of a general memo regarding a delectable Dutch donut, called an oliebollen. Think a beignet, but lighter and fluffier. This rec comes from our brother-in-law Salvador as he has been to Amsterdam a few times, and has found this sweet treat becomes more popular around the holidays. The weather turns a little chilly and suddenly it seems vendors are selling them from street carts all throughout town. Give it a taste and let us know what you think!
Go City Pass
Go City offers an all inclusive pass to 22 different attractions, ranging from the Moco Museum to the Keukenhof Bus Excursion, this cornucopia of adventures is yours for the taking. The website provides the normal ticket value of each attraction, so you can calculate the potential savings. This might not be for everyone, but it is certainly helpful to know about. If you are looking to museum hop or go nuts with tours, this could be a good option for you.
Helpful Hints for the City
Be cognizant of bikers!! This heads-up is not singular to Amsterdam, and if you have spent much time in Europe, you know bikers do not take kindly to meandering pedestrians wandering into the bike lane. It’s always important to be aware of your surroundings, but keep an extra keen eye out for bikers! This is less of a true safety concern, and more a warning to avoid getting yelled at.
Commonplace in many countries outside the Unites States, if you need to use the restroom while out adventuring, it will likely cost you a small fee. Nothing crazy to budget for, but certainly different from our cultural expectation.
Cannabis, marijuana, weed, grass… whatever you call it, it’s legal and widely available in Amsterdam. If you are looking to indulge, there is abundant opportunity to do so. In the Netherlands, a coffee shop is colloquially understood to be an establishment where cannabis is sold. Many coffee shops still operate as you would expect, selling coffee, with areas to sit and lounge— they just offer ~enhanced relaxation~ as well as the usually pick-me-up coffee shops are known for.
If you’re still deep in the planning stages of trip planning and don’t have your stay booked, check out our post highlighting a collection of unique, authentically Amsterdam Airbnbs in the city.
written by Dana
CEO of being stubbornly independent, Dana lives to speak her mind as her feisty personality lends itself to her outspoken nature. Dana epitomizes the concept of “spending money on experiences, not things” as she is constantly complaining that she has nothing to wear, but ALWAYS has her next trip on the docket. Dana is finishing up her final year at FSU this fall, but plans to jet-set off to Hawaii for a few months before joining us big kids in the adult workforce.
At the top of the Nicoya Peninsula, the Papagayo Peninsula sits, jutting out even farther into the Gulf of Papagayo, creating the Culebra Bay. Per government mandate, 70% of the land on the peninsula must remain natural and largely untouched, which helps ensure this area’s natural beautiful doesn’t become tainted by overdevelopment. Not only does this serve to preserve local ecosystems, but it adds to the exclusivity of each resort residing there.
Papagayo Peninsula is the fancy, gated-community resort experience of Costa Rica, and while I think you’d miss out on the charm of Costa Rica if you spent your whole vacation here, it really is a lovely place to spend a few days. Especially if you’re staying at the Andaz!
Below we have detailed what you can expect from your at the Andaz Papagayo Peninsula. From eateries to activities to beach-side relaxation and all the infinity pools in between, we have the scoop on everything that awaits you.
A Room with a View
First things first: the room! We booked a Bay View room, and loved the the modern, intuitive design, love terrace, and perhaps my favorite part of the room— the river stone rain shower that opened up right to our private terrace. While we spent most of our time outside exploring, it was nice to have a relaxing space to return to… with a spectacular sunset view!
Nothing negative to report! Below we have a video to get a feel for the room and the layout (briefly ft. one sleepy husband flopped down on the bed).
Dining
The restaurant options provide five unique dining experiences while still reflecting an inspiration based in local Costa Rican cuisine. On a plant-based diet? Vegetarian and vegan options are offered at every restaurant. You can read more about each niched dining experience below.
We’re apprehensive about resort food (on occasion) as it can sometimes be devoid of local cultural influence. We didn’t find this to be the case here! While there were certainly dishes we recognized, it was nice to see Costa Rica reflected in the menus.
Rio Bhongo Restaurant
Open for breakfast, lunch, and dinner, you are guaranteed to find a fantastic meal at Rio Bhongo any time of day. Our favorite was their to-die-for breakfast spread. I enjoyed a smoothie from their smoothie bar every morning, whereas Salvador went all in for the ‘Rio Bhongo Breakfast’ buffet. Bonus: you can enjoy the whole array of the Rio Bongo menu from the pool, with the attentive pool-side service.
Andaz Beach House
Does your ideal vacation entail spending the entire day beach-side? The Beach House makes this possible as you don’t even have to leave the comfort of your lounge chair to order lunch. The menu is an array of light, yet filling entrees. Don’t sleep on the homemade ice cream… a perfect afternoon treat! The less you have to plan for a beach day, the better— especially if you have little ones. It’s so nice to have someone stop by you lounge chair, grab your order, and bring your food out to you!
Ostra Restaurant
The most posh dining experience at the resort, Ostra’s menu boasts an enviable array of seafood delicacies. The ambiance is a bit more private with the intimate booths and dreamy garden set-up. This is a perfect spot to go if you’re celebrating something special… or perhaps if you just have a hankering for some good seafood.
Chao Pescao Small Plates & Bar
This is the spot if you’re looking to end the day with tapas and a cold drink. The mixologist menu is extensive, but you have to try one of their signature craft cocktails! Guaranteed to have you ready for another!
Eat In
Room service is available for all meals, with options sure to hit the spot. The best part about ordering room service is the fun little basket your meal arrives in. This dining option is available 24 hours a day!
Activities
Active Relaxation
Andaz boasts both family and adult-only infinity pools, but if you ever get the itch to leave the pool, they have a wide array of activities available to suit guests of all ages and adventure palettes. The pura vida lifestyle Costa Rica is known for makes yoga a popular practice here. For curious yogis, there are twelve different yoga classes offered. If you like yoga but are wanting more strengthening components, both pilates and barre classes are offered as well.
Beach Adventures
Andaz guests are afforded the use of kayaks, snorkeling and paddle board equipment— complimentary with your stay. In addition to the complimentary activities guests can participate in coral gardening, snorkeling, free-diving, and outrigger-canoe exploration. Who would pass up the opportunity to potentially see moray eels, spotted eagle rays, puffer fish, octopus, parrot fish, surgeonfish, turtles, trumpet fish and butterfly fish in their natural habitat?!
Bikes
If you want to explore the peninsula at your own pace, there is a complimentary bike share program available to all guests. Not only did the bikes make the peninsula exploration that much more thrilling, but we were beyond impressed with the guest services. While we were getting set up with the bikes, we mentioned to the woman assisting us that we planned to ride them around a bit and then head over to the Beach House. When we were done riding, someone was waiting at the bike drop off area with a golf cart to finish off the last leg of our beach-side journey. We were beyond impressed with the coordination and anticipation of our needs!
while out bike riding, we stopped at this overlook to take in the view
Golf
The Arnold Palmer Signature Golf Course on the Papagayo Peninsula is as beautiful as it is fun, with nearly all the holes featuring a breathtaking panoramic view. As you play through, you’ll have the opportunity to see a multitude of colorful plants, trees, birds and animals— especially the cheeky capuchin monkeys.
ONDA Spa
There’s no better way to unwind on vacation than a day at the spa unwinding, and the ONDA Spa is an oasis of relaxation. The 11,000-square-foot is tucked away amongst the trees of the jungle. It boasts nine lavish treatment rooms, including four couple’s treatment rooms. ONDA Spa offers an extensive array of treatments, including massages, body scrubs and wraps, facial therapies, manicures, pedicures, and waxing.
Costa Rican Culture
If you’re interested in expanding your Costa Rican cultural horizons, pottery and spanish classes are available. Barista, mixology, and cooking classes are also open to guests looking to learn from the best! If you’re even mildly curious about the barista class, breakfast at Rio Bhongo will seal the deal. The coffee artisans make it look like a craft, and the pour over carafe for the table makes even a simple cup of coffee feel extraordinary.
each week a schedule of activities is provided to guests
More information regarding the above activities, including cost and length of participation can be found here. If you’re wanting to adventure a little further, tours are also available through Andaz.
Kids
Have you ever heard the saying, “Once you have kids, it’s not a vacation anymore— it’s a family trip”? Well, we are still child-less adults, but we did notice all the kiddos having fun. Not only is the resort kid-friendly, but it honestly seems pretty kid-welcoming. We noticed their CAMBI Day Camp offers loads of different activities to keep kiddos of all ages busy.
If you’re planning a parents-only moment of relaxation, babysitting services are also available from 8am to 10pm. Pricing is on a sliding scale, depending on how many children you have as well as how old they are.
For tweens and teens, there is a Young Explorers camp. These older kids can enjoy sports, adventure, & exploration with their peers, while the subtle themes of boosting confidence, inspiring perseverance, and team building are encouraged.
P.S. if you’re looking for a child free slice of relaxation, there is a pool that’s specifically designated as adults only. Can’t promise it won’t get rowdy but it will be all adults making the ruckus.
Transportation
Parking
Valet and self-parking are both complimentary and available to all guests. This lends itself to a strong first impression. Someone graciously greets you at your car and facilitates your arrival— handling your bags and taking them to your room, offering a cold bottle as you step out of your car, and leading you to the beautiful view that serves as a backdrop to the check in desk.
Intra-Resort Golf Cart Shuttle
We love walking everywhere, but for guests that are unable to move as well, the golf cart shuttle service was easy to utilize, for anyone needing a hand making it to dinner. All you have to do is send a message to the provided number via WhatsApp!
Adjacent Property Shuttle
For guests ready to explore, a shuttle is available to transport hungry travelers to the Dive Bar (a nearby, off-property restaurant) or adventurers down to the Nacascolo Beach to enjoy the sand, bay, and Beach House. We’d ridden out biked down to the beach but were feeling a little lazier when it was time to return. It was so nice to just zip back to the resort, easy peasy.
Airport Shuttle
If you plan to stay at the resort for your entire stay and/or utilize their tours exclusively for your Costa Rican exploration, it likely makes the most sense for you to utilize their airport shuttle service. The pricing for this is included below as this is not available on their website (pricing is in US dollars).
Prado
up to 3 passengers
$130.00
Expedition
up to 4 passenger
$186.00
Lexus
up to 4 passengers
$220.00
This information was provided for our stay in Jan 2021 and is likely to change over time.
If you think this may be a good option for you, you can contact reservations.papagayo@andaz.com with any additional inquiries or to reserve your transportation.
Thoughtful Touches
Welcome Gift
All guests receive a pair of flip-flops as well as a charming fedora-style hat. Not only is it fun to arrive with a gift awaiting you, but they’re both practical! The Costa Rican sun will burn you if you’re not carful, so it’s nice to be able to protect your head and face. These vacation essentials come in handy while visiting, but are such a fun reminder of vacation whenever you wear them again at home.
Got Your Back
Beyond the usual courtesy amenities provided to guests, towels, sunscreen, and bug spray were available pool-side, beach-side, and anywhere else guests might need it. Especially for those of us that burn easily, this is a godsend! It’s the little touches like this that make a difference.
Mini Bar Snack
The worst kind of mini bar is one that charges $10 for a snickers bar. No such case here! Not only is the mini-bar stocked with all kinds of local snacks, but all non-alcoholic drinks and snack treats are complimentary with your stay. Even better, your snacks and beverages are replenished every day!
Parting Thoughts
We enjoyed a few nights at Andaz at the end of our two-week road trip through Northern Costa Rica. This luxury resort provides a beautiful escape for travelers looking to indulge. We highly recommend this resort, and we would definitely go back. The wide array of experiences makes it perfect for intimate couples as well as exuberant families. The only downside? You absolutely have to leave to truly have an understanding and appreciation for the rest of the country. While the Papagayo Peninsula is gorgeous, we 1000% renting a car or booking a tour to head over to Arenal take in the lush volcanic jungle.
We visited in January of 2021, just as the country was beginning to open back up for travel. As such, our stay was during a relatively low occupancy season. Despite the havoc the pandemic has wrecked on the hospitality industry, we received nothing less than exemplary service throughout our stay.
Salvador loves his Hyatt card. He recently made it to the ‘globalist’ tier of membership, and touts this as a proud accomplishment. As such, our stay at Andaz Costa Rica was actually completely paid for with points we’d accrued. Andaz CR is an Award Category 5, so if you have Hyatt points burning a hole in your pocket, this is your sign to spend them here!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Rio de Jianero is a bustling coastal city in southwestern Brazil. Known for a wide array of attractions, from the towering Christ Redeemer statue to hosting the 2016 Olympics to its illustrious annual Carnaval festival, Rio is a mecca for adventurous travelers. To ensure you hit all the highlights, we’ve compiled a list of all the best places to visit in Rio!
This city really is much more than what may initially meet the eye. Home to a national park, one of the seven wonders of the world, and endless sandy coastline, you will have no problem finding Rio adventures to fill your days. The beautiful weather year-round is just the cherry on top!
How does a gal find herself in Rio time and time again? In high school, I was part of a Brazilian church and made so many amazing life-long friends, and I have been fortunate enough to explore various pockets of Brazil when I have gone to visit. Over the years, I’ve gone down to visit on numerous occasions, and I have become increasingly familiar with my more favorite areas to visit. Rio is one of them! I love the big-city-meets-beachy-keen-relaxation ambiance of the city, while also maintaining such strong cultural roots.
Below I have detailed my favorite spots to grab a bite, awesome hotels, and the best must-do activities in Rio— as well as a handful of tips and trick to ensure your trip goes smoothly. Cheers to a fabulous adventure!
Airport Arrival
First and foremost, how to get there! Antonio Carlos Jobim International Airport, commonly referred to by its original name, Galeão International Airport (GIG), is the larger of the two airports that serve Rio. Approximately 20 minutes south is the smaller Santos Dumont Airport (SDU). Barra is 25-45 minutes from the airport, depending on where you arrive.
When traveling to and throughout Brazil, we found Latam Airlines to be our preferential choice for international travel. When booking your ticket, we highly recommend taking advantage of their seat selection and checked bag. The price varies upon the flight, but it is a 7+ hour flight, so you’ll want a good seat!
Due to the shear size of Brazil, it’s possible you may do some intra-country flying. If so, we found for these shorter duration flights, Latam, Azul, and Gol Linhas Aéreas Inteligentes (GOL) are all equally good options.
Sleep Tight, Sleep Right
Barra de Tijuca, colloquially referred to as Barra, is an affluent neighborhood in the western region of the city. This is where we recommend staying to base your Rio-travels out of.
When we visit, we usually stay at the Wyndham or the Windsor Marapendi. You cannot go wrong with either hotel! At the Wyndam, no matter which room you’re in, they all room have a view. Your stay also includes complimentary use of a set of beach chairs as well as an umbrella. While it does cost a small fee, we were grateful to be able to do laundry.
While both hotels are beautiful, the Windsor Marapendi is a bit more posh with its rooftop pool and marble floors throughout the lobby. You can take in the view from the 17th floor or in style on the beach, with the provided loungers and umbrellas.
A note: There are so many beautiful Airbnb stays that are certainly worth exploring, but as we were two young women traveling together, we felt more comfortable staying in a hotel. As a bonus, hotels are very reasonably priced here— even for 4 and 5 star hotels!
Transportation Station
Do you need to rent a car? Nope! Uber is a safe and reliable method of transportation. We used Uber both for day-to-day travel as well as transportation to and from the airport. As a female traveler (sometimes solo and sometimes with a friend), I always double check I’m in the right car (just like we do back home)— to be extra safety conscientious!
That Cash Money
The exchange rate fluctuates, but currency converters can help estimate costs when you’re building your travel budget. The USD to Brazilian Real exchange rate tends to be pretty favorable, when visiting from the United States. You do not need to bring cash or pull reais out upon arrival.
Good Eats
There is so much amazing food to sample when you’re in Brazil, so eat to your heart’s content! From refreshing acai to authentic Brazilian steakhouses to amazingly fresh seafood, you won’t be hungry for long in Rio. These are a few of my favorite spots!
Balada Mix
If you are looking for some acai, look no further than Balada Mix. We went back for seconds of the acai, but they had loads of options that looked like a delicious snack or a light lunch. While we were there, their sign outside said Baladinha, so don’t let confusing signage lead you astray!
La Copa Carne e Vino
A short drive away in Copacabana, La Copa Carne e Vino is a small restaurant delivering big. The eatery is owned by a family friend, and after hearing about the family restaurant, it was such a pleasure to go and experience the Brazilian steakhouse in all its charming glory.
Coco Bamboo
In the Casa & Gourmet Mall the options for outstanding food are plentiful, but Coco Bamboo stands out. Not only is the food delicious, but the live Brazilian music made it both a culinary and cultural experience. A must try!
Pobre Vino
The dining at Village Mall draws almost as many visitors as the shopping. Our favorite steakhouse here was Pobre Juan. We love a good steak, but ended up trying the salmon here and it did NOT disappoint!
Classico Beach Club
Along the beach in Barra, there are restaurants referred to as ‘kiosks’ for beach-goers to grab a delicious meal, while they watch the waves crash. If your beach day takes you near post/station 2, Classico Beach Club is ~in our opinion~ the best kiosk on the beach!
Adventures to be Had
Surf’s Up
I’ve loved surfing ever since I was in middle school, so I always try to get my hands on a surfboard when I find myself in a new beach town! Right across the street from the Wyndham Hotel, you’ll find Escuela de Surf. If you’ve never tried surfing before, a 1 hour private lesson only costs R$120, or ~$25 USD (depending on the conversion). They provide everything you need to shred the gnar! The board, the rash-guard shirt, and most importantly the expert advice to get you up and cruising.
Rio Adventures
If you are looking for an adrenaline rush, Rio Adventures has you covered. From hiking and climbing to hang-gliding and parachuting, they have something for everyone looking to make the most of the city. Different tours are based out of various niches throughout the city, but you won’t have to wander far if you’re looking to go parachuting as this thriller is run out of Barra.
Joatinga Beach
This harder-to-get-to beach is worth the extra effort! Nestled in the coastline, it affords one of the most lush, stunning views in Rio. To access you must to pass through a gated condominium community, so some people mistaken assume it’s a private beach. It’s not! It’s a public beach with free access, so go take it in (always being respectful to the locals that live there)! While you might be able to buy a coconut water, there’s not going to be the same availability of food kiosks on the beach here, so be sure to pack your snacks!
Jardim Botanico
Jardim Botanico is a collection of beautiful botanical gardens. Hours fly by wandering through the lush landscape. It’s not necessary to buy tickets in advance; however, they only accept cash at the park admissions gate, so if you want to pay by card, you will need to do so here.
Cable Car
The Cable Car Adventure on Sugarloaf Mountain provides the most breath-taking view in all of Rio. The cable car, holding up to 65 people, provides a panoramic view of the city, taking in the forests, the Bay, Christ the Redeemer, and everything in between. The cable car climbs throughout the ride, reaching a peak height of 1,300 feet. BEST. VIEW. IN. RIO.
Parque Nacional da Tijuca
How often is it that a big city has an amazing national park right in its midst?! Tijuca National Park offers a rather diverse, chose-your-own adventure experience for visitors. For some the vistas and viewpoints will thrill, while others will be glad they packed their hiking boots, so they can hit the trails to take in the vibrant landscape and plentiful waterfalls. Thrill seekers will make their way to the park as it serves as the perfect perch for hang gliding! This impressive park holds the hotly contest title for largest urban forest in the world, with over 225 species of birds, 63 species of mammals, and 70 different amphibians & retiles calling this lush biome their home.
Christ the Redeemer
Perhaps Rio’s most renowned attraction, Christ the Redeemer sits at the top of the city, actually nestled in the Tijuca Forest National Park. At the base of Christ the Redeemer, you can both look up in awe at the magnitude of this inspired statue as well as out across the city and bay. Acknowledged as one of the Modern Seven Wonders of the World, the magnitude of this monument and the expansive overlook are a humbling reminder of how small we are in this huge world.
The cog train is the preferred and most scenic option to get up to Christ the Redeemer. During the 20 minute ride, it traverses through the Atlantic Forest, up Corcovado Mountain, depositing at your destination.
Tip: Go early! As this is a hallmark attraction of Rio, it will become more and more crowded throughout the day. Generally speaking it will also be less busy on a week-day.
As an aside, if you’re looking for an airplane-read, you can’t go wrong with the first book in the Seven Sisters Series by Lucinda Riley. Rio and Christ the Redeemer are interwoven in this story of love and loss.
Just So You Know
Crime is something to be aware of when traveling. While we are huge proponents of not allowing social misconceptions to dictate, safety precautions and common sense when traveling to new or unfamiliar regions. An example of this would be that, travelers should avoid venturing into favelas (Brazilian slums). In the midst of Rio, exists the country’s largest favela: Rocinha.
Depending on what route you take from the airport to Barra, you may be able to see it from afar. If you take the more southern route, as you come through the long tunnel to get to Barra, look to the right and a little behind you, and you will see this massive community stacked up the hillside. In the same way it’s unwise to treat the slums of any city as a tourist attraction, we do not recommend venturing too close to Rocinha for your sight-seeing purposes.
written by McKenna
If you look up diva in the dictionary, you will find a picture of McKenna Lee. Loud-mouthed and overly opinionated she may have the biggest personality (read: attitude) of us all. McKenna is in college at FGCU studying digital media design, but her passion lies in her small business Mack Swimwear. She lives for days spent in a bathing suit, and tries to go surfing in every new beach town she visits.
Asheville, NC has become a popular destination for vacation escapades, bachelorette parties, weddings, and craft beer aficionados. If you are looking to elevate your stay, a treehouse makes for a unique way to experience both the allure of the city as well as the grandeur of the Blue Ridge Mountains.
All of these breath-taking treehouses are rented by superhosts, so you can book with confidence. As a general recommendation, we suggest reading the descriptions in full as well as reviews, just to ensure you won’t have any sneaky surprises. We have found that often, for every incredible view, there’s usually a steep driveway to accompany it.
You may come for the view, but you’ll have a hard time leaving all the upscale yet homey touches… starting with the double slipper clawfoot tub on the porch. Whether you come alone or bring a friend, the queen size bed and air mattress ensure everyone has a place to rest their eyes.
If Hansel and Gretel were wandering through the forest, they would surely abandon the gingerbread house for this modern beauty. Who wouldn’t want to end the day in that rocking chair, watching the sun go down? Up to four can enjoy this delightful treehouse, with a double bed and an air mattress available to accommodate weary adventurers.
This mountain cabin meets treehouse escape has a beautiful wrap around porch to take in the views. The hanging swing bed is the perfect spot to snuggle in with a cup of coffee and watch the sun rise. When it’s time for light’s out, a queen bed and a sofa bed are available to carry you off to your sweet dreams.
This treehouse is less luxury and more of a high-end-camping meets forest getaway. Don’t worry, you’ll still have air conditioning, a double bed (plus a sofa bed as well!), and a hot shower. As a bonus, there’s a saltwater pool available to relax in, just a short walk away. The hanging bridge really gives this treehouse an adventurous vibe!
Note: You will have to be okay with an outdoor shower and a compost toilet.
This treehouse is perfect for all kinds of travelers with its open layout and full kitchen. It boasts both indoor and outdoor shower options. At the end of the day, a queen bed and a sofa bed are available to catch some zzzz’s on.
This ethereal treehouse feels like the home of a boho-hippie tinker bell. The location may say Woodfin, but this gorgeous treehouse is only a 20 minute drive from the Asheville Airport. When it’s time for sleeping, this fortress of solitude offers a queen bed and a sofa bed.
This house is appropriately named as it’s aesthetic is very Harry Potter meets Swiss Family Robinson. The undertone of Hogworts decor is cheeky, without being too overt as the architecture and finishes of the house make this treehouse a beautiful stay. Two queen beds make this an abode for up to four guests to comfortably enjoy.
If you’re looking for a breath-taking treehouse to accommodate a large group, this house is a dream. Easily sleeping nine people, this expansive treehouse will make you want to come back to enjoy the view over and over, for each passing season.
Rated: 4.80/5 (20 reviews)
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
If you are looking for a sign to take a trip to Costa Rica, this is your sign!! You will not regret exploring the rich environment Costa Rica has to offer. Below we have detailed some common Costa Rica travel FAQs to aid fellow travelers in planning their next great adventure. Leave a comment or email us if you have any additional questions!
Do I need to speak Spanish?
No! The overwhelming majority of Costa Ricans we encountered, especially those involved with the more touristy aspects of our trip, spoke impressive English. That being said, we encourage anyone traveling to a country with a native language differing than their own to at least make an attempt at learning a little, but your knowledge or lack thereof of Spanish won’t largely impact your experience. It certainly helps to speak the language as it tends to gain favoritism from the locals.
Is Costa Rica safe?
Costa Rica is a safe country to visit, with the majority of crimes tourists experience being related to petty theft. This is especially so if you’re planning on staying in more touristy areas. Generally speaking, common sense should keep you safe. If you get a flat tire while driving, be mindful of where you pull over, don’t leave all your valuables in open sight in the car, etc. Just because it looks like paradise doesn’t mean you’re in a fairy tale! However, we must note our experience was almost entirely in rural areas. We did not spend any time in the big cities, and as such cannot speak on that.
Is an Airbnb with no AC miserable?
We visited in January and half the places we stayed had AC and the other half did not. Not to sound like an American prima donna, but I had some reservations about the stays lacking AC. We went in January, but Costa Rica remains pretty warm year-round. In Arenal, it stayed cool throughout the day, so the lack of air conditioning went unnoticed. In Santa Teresa, the fan set-up came in clutch to ensure everything stayed cool.
If you’re going to Costa Rica in the summer and plan on staying in Airbnbs, definitely double check the air conditioning status of the unit. If you have any concerns, message the owner to see how they keep the unit cool—especially at night, to see it that fits your needs.
This depends on the itinerary you have planned and how many people you’re traveling with. If you are staying at a hotel or resort for your time in Costa Rica, they likely have shuttle services they offer, which could be useful to avoid the hassle of renting a car. If you’re a little nervous at the prospect of driving in a foreign country or perhaps you’re flight lands at night—whatever the reason, if you need a shuttle, there are a number of shuttle services, like this one that can help you get where you need to go.
Planning on exploring multiple regions, a bit more independently? A rental car is recommended. This is going to be the most streamlined way to get from point A to point B. We used Vamos, and 100% recommend them!
A very adventurous traveler might be able to swing bus transportation, but this would definitely require a bit more advanced planning—both in knowledge of bus routes as well as having colones, cash, or coins on you to pay for fares. Not impossible, but also not for everyone!
How long were you on the road for?
We spent about 15 hours in the car for the two weeks we spent here, which sounds like a lot but was feasible as none of our drives lasted longer than 4 hours. Stopping along the way as things struck our fancy (usually food) helped break up the drive.
I have linked google map directions to our road trip journey here. We landed in Liberia and drove to Arenal first. From there, we went to Samara, followed by Santa Teresa, and finished up on the Papagayo Peninsula. This worked out well as the Papagayo Peninsula is only a 30-minute drive back the Liberia Airport. You can read more about all these stops here (spoiler alert: food, tour, & Airbnb recommendations ahead).
Fastest way to get to the Nicoya Peninsula from San Jose?
If you arrived in San Jose, but want to explore the Nicoya Peninsula, you can avoid the extended road trip with a ferry ride across the Gulf of Nicoya. Departing from Punta Arenas, they have two drop off locations: Paquera and Naranjo. Getting off in Paquera will bring you to the southern portion of the peninsula to enjoy Tambor, Montezuma, Malpais, Santa Teresa. The Naranjo stop with bring you to the west side of the peninsula to San Miguel, Nicoya, Nosara, Samara.
The trip takes about 70 minutes and costs ~$25 one way for a car and driver. With 5 different departure times, one is sure to fit your schedule. The ferry can hold up to over 150 cars, so it’s usual for it to completely fill up, but you can make your reservation ahead of time here. It’s always a good idea to make these reservations in advance to ensure your spot— especially if you’re traveling during the holidays.
When booking your reservation the website may initially come up in Spanish, but there should be an option that pops up in the top, right corner of your screen to switch over to English. Once in English the website it pretty straightforward. The only snag you may encounter is where it asks for your license plate. If you plan on renting a car, you can just put “Rental Car” if you do not yet know your license plate number.
What’s it like driving in Costa Rice? What are the condition of the roads?
We mainly traveled in the Northwest portion of Costa Rica. Due to our selective regional exposure, we cannot attest to the road conditions of the whole country, but we found all the major roads to be well paved and easy to navigate. As we started to get into towns or areas off the beaten path, we encounter potholes of various sizes, but none that were an obstacle to us.
As you get into the southern portion of the Nicoya Peninsula, the roads do become a bit more dusty and gravelly. This does not make them impermeable to travelers, but it does make travel take longer.
The climb up to a house can be a bit of a different story. If your Airbnb suggests a car with four-wheel drive, it’s usually for good reason. The road up to our Airbnbs in Arenal and Santa Teresa were a little treacherous and could not have been done without all tires on deck.
Should I rent a GPS from the rental car agency?
YES! Rent a GPS if you plan of road-tripping at all. We had been on the fence about this—my husband thought we could figure it out, but I’m a safety-first, safety away kind of a gal, so we rented a GPS device. The roads are pretty straightforward with helpful signage and such for most of where you need to go. We didn’t need the GPS 80% of the time we were driving around, but the 20% we did, it definitely saved us. Missing one or two turns can set you back hours!
Any other tips for planning a trip?
Before we go someplace new, we love scouring the internet for anything we can find to maximize our time on our next adventure. As an old soul, I also still love a paper copy book to mark and tab up. Our favorite hands-on, paper guidebooks are from Lonely Planet. Their most updated edition will be available November 2021, and can be found on Amazon here.
Less of a tip, and more just something to know. When you depart through LIB or SJO, every passenger must pay a $29 departure tax before your airline will allow you to check in. This isn’t a cost that breaks anyone’s budget, but rather a cost to be aware of.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Costa Rica is a country that has range. You’ll get jungles and volcanos as well as endless sandy beaches. Whether you’re looking for a fantastic adventure or big relaxation, you’ll find it here in the intriguing niched culture of this Central American gem.
Our Costa Rican adventure was focused on the northwestern part of the country as we explored the greater Arenal region and the Nicoya Peninsula. Each town we visited had its own persona: Arenal with its lush forest biome, Samara’s beachy keen relaxation, Santa Teresa that oozed surfer chic, and the Papagayo Peninsula with its opulent luxury. Visiting all four regions afforded us a glimpse of this diverse country. Below I have detailed all the explorations, food, and places we stayed along the way— as well as things we would potentially do differently if we were to do it all again.
When heading down to Costa Rica, there’s two main airports people typically fly into: San Jose (SJO) and Liberia (LIR). While San Jose is the capital, it’s not always the cheaper option to fly into. Be sure to check both airports when you’re looking at flights. Not only could Liberia be cheaper, but it might mean less drive time as well!
Here’s our road trip map, for anyone looking to enjoy the same outstanding adventure. If you have more questions about some of the logistics of travel, check out our Nine Helpful Costa Rica Travel FAQs.
A R E N A L
the drive in
We landed in Liberia, CR, hopped in the rental car, and started making our way to Arenal. Along the way, we stopped at the Café & Macadamia for the first of many casadas (a traditional Costa Rican plate) we enjoyed during our time here. If you see it while you’re driving, it’s worth pulling over to grab a bite! Not only was the food delicious, but the view from the overlook was beautiful as well. As we continued our drive, the breath-taking views abounded. Taking in all the scenery made the three-hour drive fly by!
mountainous jungle exploration
Arenal is home to a landscape vastly different than the beaches to its east and west. With Mount Arenal as the crown jewel, we found this area to be full with both greenery and adventure. If you enjoy trekking through the forest and spending time with nature, this area is ideal. We spent a morning at Sky Adventures and had the most fantastic time soaring across zip lines, traversing the forest canopy, crossing Tibetan bridges, canyoning, rappelling, and my personal favorite, the Tarzan swing! This is sure to surpass any previous zip lining experience you have had. If you own a GoPro, make sure you bring it to document the experience and save some money! Otherwise you can rent one for the day. If you consider yourself outdoorsy at all, this is a must-do!
white water rafting
As if one action packed day wasn’t enough, we spent our second day in Arenal with Wave, endeavoring in their white-water rafting excursion. We signed up for the Class 3 & 4 rapids trip and had such a blast. On the bus ride to our drop-in point, we had awesome guides talking about the areas we were driving through. We ended up getting dunked in the Sarapiqui River, but we both made it safely back into our raft. That in-the-moment excitement made for quite the story to share with friends and family.
After we victoriously conquered the rapids, we enjoyed casadas, local coffee, and a shot of Cacique Guaro (Costa Rican liqueur). It’s worth noting, this rapids trip was a HUGE adrenaline rush. Be prepared for some fully immersive fun!
Not keen on such a big epinephrine dump? Accommodating outdoor explorers of all comfort levels, Wave also offered hot spring, sloth, ATV, and horse backing riding tours.
yoga
Before we left El Castillo, we went to Essence Arenal Boutique Hostel for a morning yoga class. The yoga studio is towards the back of the property, so we enjoyed a nice pre-yoga warm up walk. Beautiful, serene, and well worth the price of admission. It was a perfect ending to our time in this beautiful area.
brewskis
As we were headed out of Arenal, on our way to Samara, we stopped at the Lake Arenal Brewery. To be honest, they still haven’t totally mastered craft beers yet (per my craft beer loving husband), but the view is pretty stellar! We didn’t spend the night here, but we were surprised to see they also had a hotel here as well. This could be a cool, local place to stay for a night.
sleeps
We loved the Airbnb we stayed at in El Castillo— a small town in the Arenal region. It had breathtaking views of both Mount Arenal and Lake Arenal from a cozy little botanical garden. The Airbnb listing shows you the gorgeous views, but truly, they’re even better in person. A word of caution… four wheel drive and a bit of determination are definitely necessary to navigate the dirt road up to the house.
If you’re more interested in a resort, Nayara Gardens embodies laid back luxury, with their intimate rainforest abodes. They provide a wonderfully curated relaxing experience while the beauty of nature speaks for itself.
S A M A R A
food first
After the adventure rush of Arenal, the beach town vibes of Samara were a welcome change of pace. Growing up in South Florida, there was a sort of familiarity to the touristy nature of the popular beach town. We arrived in Samara and killed some time at Coco’s while we were waiting to get into our Airbnb. We didn’t have anything to eat, but Salvador only had big thumbs up for the beers he tried. Coco’s seems like it is geared towards the tourists, but do not let that dissuade you!
Later that evening we came back to the downtown area and wandered around. La Dolce Vita had a fun outdoor set-up and tasty drinks… a perfect sunset spot! For dinner, Salvador had a hankering for a whole fish. We found Marisqueria Colochos, and they did not disappoint! He tackled the whole fish at a few different restaurants (4) while we were in Costa Rica, but Marisqueria’s was his favorite.
best way to start the day
All three mornings in Samara, we started the day with a walk along the beach that led to Roots Bakery. Talk about a delicious start to the day! If sweet treats and delicious breakfast sandwiches are your jam, this is the place to be. Starting the day with a breakfast walk was a nice way to be active before spending the afternoon poolside.
Italian in Costa Rica
We went to Mama Gui’s for dinner and highly recommend—both for ambiance and quality of food. When we arrived, it was a 15-minute wait for a table, so they offered us a complimentary glass of wine while we waited. Listening to live music with a glass of Chardonnay in hand on a cooled off evening in Costa Rica? Does it get much better than that? The answer turned out to be an overwhelming ~yes~ not long later as we dug into our food.
the Belen waterfall
The Belen waterfall and swimming hole are only a short, 20-minute drive away. You do have a short, moderately steep walk down to the watering hole. It’s nothing that should deter anyone… to call it a hike would be an overstatement. There’s ample space, so you can sun bathe and cool off in the water. For those feeling extra brave, you can climb up and jump off the top of the waterfall. If frolicking and sunning has worked up an appetite, there’s a small soda (local, outdoor café) on your way back to Samara that sells delicious casados.
A couple notes: make sure to bring a couple colones (Costa Rican currency) for the gentleman in the parking lot. He stays up at the parking lot, watching the cars for everyone at the waterfall. Also, be careful swimming through fast-flowing water as there is an underwater cave people have drowned in before. Nothing to be afraid of—just a friendly reminder not to be reckless.
Salvador won’t be winning Olympic diving medals any time soon, but he sure does jump with gusto!
a fantastic final promenade
Our last evening in Samara, we didn’t have a traditional dinner, so much as we had a tapas-style dinner. You can’t beat sampling drinks and appetizers at various restaurants downtown to maximize culinary exploration. A fun way to round out the full Samara experience!
sleeps
There are lots of different options for sleeping accommodations in Samara, but we liked that our Airbnb had a pool and a hammock you could just hang out in, while you took in the view—made it hard to want to leave!
S A N T A T E R E S A
As we hopped from one beach town to another, we couldn’t help but notice the vibe of Santa Teresa was completely different than that of Samara. Santa Teresa is a larger town, but somehow felt less touristy. There’s basically one main, dusty road than runs the length of the town. Pretty much everything you need can either be found there or not far off the path.
a sports bar . . . in paradise?
We arrived into town around lunch, and I am not one to miss a meal, so we sought out Chicken Joe’s for some authentic cuisine. Wish I could say it wasn’t so, but our first evening in Santa Teresa the Baltimore Ravens were playing in the NFL playoffs. Being the die-hard fan he is, Salvador just couldn’t miss it. So after dropping our things at our Airbnb, we found ourselves at Kooks—a sports bar, playing American sports in the middle of Costa Rica. Ladies, hide your husbands!
Despite initially rolling my eyes, both the food and drinks were delicious—plus they recommended La Glida, the gelato shop down the road. Anyone that leads me to fresh gelato is good people! Certainly, not a bad way to kick off our first day in Santa Teresa.
hang ten
It had been a while since we’d attempted surfing, so instead of just renting boards we committed to a surf lesson with Randy at Jackalopes Surf Shop. Zero regrets about this decision as we were all the better for it. Salvador has a frustrating knack for coordination, while I on the other hand received a majority of the patient tips and encouraging corrections from our newfound amigo. That being said, BOTH of us caught waves by the end of the lesson! Plus we were able to use the board the rest of the day to conquer the whitewash waves with confidence.
After getting tossed being repeatedly humbled during our surf lesson, a massage sounded like a dream. I was all too grateful we’d arranged this in advance! How it it that 60 minutes of relaxation flies by so quickly?
sustenance stops
We had more than worked up an appetite by the time we landed at El Carmen. The beachy views and good food would have made for an above average meal themselves, but the pipas frias (cold coconuts filled with fresh water) cart right by the outdoor patio were the perfect replenishment to our afternoon spent battling the waves.
Along our way home, we stopped at The Bakery for a little sweet treat. It was the first of MANY trips to this tasty spot. If you have a sweet tooth, you absolutely must check out the amazing collection of baked delights.
Tortuga Island
Perhaps out most adventurous day in Santa Teresa was actually when we hopped in the car and drove down to Montezuma for a day trip out to Tortuga Island with Zuma Tours. The boat ride out to Tortuga Island takes about 45 minutes, but we stopped along the way for an unexpected surprise. The captain spotted some humpback whales! We kept our distance, but it was so incredible to see such a huge animal in its natural habitat—especially since we saw a mom and her baby.
Once we arrived at our destination, there were far more animals to be found, with myriads of fish galore. My favorites were a black tip reef shark and a couple starfish that seemed partial to me. We were able to snorkel around two different areas, and then we headed to the island for some lunch and lounging. The food was all freshly prepared, and for those looking to elevate the meal, the bar on the island sold pipas frias with the option to add rum for any snorkelers that deserved a little extra treat.
The boat ride back to Monezuma went smoothly, with a school of dolphin joining us for a while along our journey back. Outside of the scenic trip itself, the tour guides went above and beyond to ensure everyone enjoyed themselves. Could not recommend this highly enough! If you have a GoPro, this would be the adventure to bring it on.
beach bum daze
Spending an entire day on the beach was on Salvador’s Costa Rican bucket list. On our last full day in Santa Teresa, I went to a yoga class at the Nautilus Boutique Hotel, while Salvador set off to find a worthy beach-side set-up. As an occasional yogi at best, I found the flow challenging yet inviting. It was a nice way to have some meaningful movement before heading to the beach. I left more than ready for some bummy beach-side relaxation!
While I was getting Zen, Salvador’s search led him to Nantipa. He bought two day passes, staked out a prime lounging location, and we stayed there until the sun went down. The passes cost $75/person, but we each had a $50 credit to use towards the Manzú Beachfront Restaurant. In addition to the dining credit, we were also afforded use of their pool, towels, bathrooms, and assortment of lounge chairs. It made for a calm relaxing day, and when we went on a walk in the afternoon, we left our stuff on the beach without worry. At the end of the day, we had a front row, toes-in-the-sand view as the sun dipped into the ocean.
sleeps
Perhaps the most obsession-worthy view of our trip was that from our Santa Teresa Airbnb. We had the most amazing sunset view, but the infinity pool was certainly a cherry on top. We stayed here for five days and loved that someone came every other day to tidy up. Check out that view!!
P A P A G A Y O P E N I N S U L A
We rounded out our Costa Rican adventure with two days on the Papagayo Peninsula at the Andaz Resort, and the views did not disappoint! What is it about an infinity pool that just takes relaxation to the next level? This was our most posh stay during our time in Costa Rica, and it was wonderful to finish our trip luxuriously. You can learn more about our experience as well as additional adventures available through Andaz Costa Rica here.
eat wander repeat
Upon arrival, we ate lunch at the Rio Bhongo Restaurant. Our lunch hit the spot, but their breakfast menu caught our eye and had us making breakfast plans for the following day. After lunch, we settled into our room and then headed out to explore the resort property. Our favorite way to acquaint ourselves with a new place is simply to wander about.
Our exploration took us through the resort, down the beach, across the marina, until we could walk no farther. A restaurant/bar called the Dive Bar (not dive-y at all) was a perfect spot to share drinks and look out across the inlet. Tuckered out from our long day, we ended up calling it an early evening and ordered room service. It arrived in a festive picnic basket—the cutest dinner-in-bed experience!
bike n’ beach babe
We woke up excited to hit the breakfast buffet and smoothie bar at the Rio Bhongo, and it was just as amazing a spread as we’d hoped. After breakfast, we discovered the Papagayo Peninsula electric bike share program (included in the resort fee), and hopped on a few bike to explore AND get a bit of exercise in. We rode bikes down to the Beach House on Playa Nacascolo, the shared beach area between Andaz and Four Season’s, and were delighted by the lounging set-up and beach-side service.
It is not uncommon to see cute little Capuchin monkeys in the trees while you’re lounging by the pool or down by the beach, but beware! They may try to run off with your things—cute but clever! A short walk down the beach, a local was offering rides on a banana boat, which was a perfect way to cool off. We wandered back to the Beach House and shared some homemade ice cream from the Beach House before heading back to our room.
authentic eats
For our final evening in Costa Rica, we left the resort to have a truly authentic meal a bit north at Casa del Mar. Playa Cabuyal is a short walk down the road, so we found a bit of sand to hold down, watched the sun set, and headed towards the restaurant for Salvador to enjoy his final Costa Rican whole fish. We were the only ones there, so we were able to have quality conversations with the bartender and cook. It was a very nice place with equally kind people.
pre-flight paddle boarding
Our last morning here, we woke up and headed down to the beach for some paddle boarding as soon as they opened. Salvador had never tried it before and was surprised how much coordination it took—even on a calm, flat day. When it was time to go, we hopped back in the car and made the short, 30-minute trip to the airport. We weren’t ready for our Costa Rican adventure to come to a close, but we were so thrilled to have been able to explore such a special place.
IF WE WERE TO DO IT ALL AGAIN . . .
Costa Rica was a wonderful place to enjoy a delightful array of niched sub-cultures. Each city we visited had its own distinct identity. Arenal is so different from Santa Teresa, which also differs from the Papagayo Peninsula. We stayed 2-5 nights at each city we visited, so we could cultivate an authentic snapshot of each area but still gain an appreciation for the country as a whole.
THE HIGHS
If you’re not looking to road trip, you could easily spend a whole week in Arenal, Santa Teresa, or the Papagayo Peninsula. Arenal has a truly breathtaking microclimate, and is a must-visit if you thrive on outdoor adventure. Hanging bridges, Tarzan swings, zip-lines, hot springs, rafting… if you’re looking to connect with nature and feel alive, this should be at the top of your Costa Rica itinerary.
Santa Teresa epitomizes the “pura vida” lifestyle the country is known for, in all the best ways. As a bonus, Montezuma is an easy 30-minute drive, making it easy to pop over for a day. Despite being at the bottom of the Nicoya Peninsula, we felt Santa Teresa was worth the drive!
The resorts on the Papagayo Peninsula are the definition of luxury in Costa Rica. While we certainly enjoyed Andaz (and recommend it highly!), it truly seems like you can’t go wrong with any of the resorts on the peninsula. This seems like a perfect area for couples looking to splurge… honeymoon anyone? Or perhaps a family interested in all the activities they offer— you could certainly keep the kids busy! The only word of warning? The private beaches, infinity pools, and luxury amenities might make it hard to want to leave the resort!
THE LOWS
While we certainly enjoyed our three relaxing days in Samara, it did not leave us wanting more the way the other three areas did. A wonderful, calm change of pace from our Arenal excitement, but also just a too bit touristy for us. If we were to do it all again, I’m not sure we would return to Samara. No horror stories or sordid tales, I’m just not keen on visiting another country to have a touristy beach vacation.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
In the southwest corner of Colorado the charming, yet bustling town of Durango thrives. Sitting at an elevation of over 6,500 feet, this mile high city is a cornucopia of influence as Colorado flair meets the historic epoch of the wild west. All with a backdrop of awe-inspiring mountainous beauty. We visited in the summer and savored our long weekend in Durango, but this four-season destination left us wanting more.
THE GREAT OUTDOORS
Outdoor adventure abounds at a wide array of comfort levels. The Animas River Trail is a tranquil, paved path anyone can enjoy via varying modes of transportation. If you’re looking for a little more interaction with nature, the following options are sure to thrill.
Epic Explorations
Mountain biking trails are littered throughout the mountains as this area is a known mountain biking utopia. If you are flying in for a short trip, Pedal the Peaks has bikes available to rent. AllTrails and MTB Project are two awesome resources to consult out as you plan which trails to hit. Eager to give mountain biking a try, but are hesitant about navigating the journey? Durango Mountain Bike Tours is available to help guide you!
White Water Rafting on the Animas River is the perfect way to enjoy both an adrenaline rush as well as a historical recounting of Durango. Durango Rafting Company tours take you through some Class III rapids and run either 2 hours or 4 hours. The 4-hour experience includes three hours on the water and a delicious lunch from Serious Texas BBQ.
The Animas Mountain Trail is a beautiful six-mile loop that is easily accessible from town. This makes it an easy hike for visitors without a rental car to explore. We were looking for a shorter hike, so we did the Hogsback & Slime Gulch Loop, and it was humbling!! As you approach the summit, the trail becomes rather steep and narrow. As a group of moderately fit mid-20s to early 30s, we were able to do this loop in sneakers without poles, but I wouldn’t necessarily recommend that for everyone. The first portion of our descent was a combo butt-scoot/crab walk down. AllTrails reports it at 3.3 miles, but we must have done a bit of extra wandering as my Apple Watch tracked it at just under 4 miles. The view was amazing from the top!
Mesa Verde National Park is about 40 minutes outside Durango, so you will need to either rent a car or go with a tour group. If you choose to rent a car, be sure to pay your entrance fee before you go, as service in the park can get spotty. Durango River Trippers offers a 7.5-hour tour that allows for full exploration of the national park as well as lunch. Whether you go with a tour or adventure alone, the cliff dwellings transport you to another lifetime! Another must-see, the Park Point trail is a unique opportunity to overlook four different states from a single vantage point.
TRAVEL BY RAIL
The Silverton Train departs from the train station in downtown Durango, and takes you on a full day’s adventure. The ride is three and a half hours each way, allowing you to take in the uniquely southern portion of the Rocky Mountains. Throughout the journey, passes through Horseshoe Curve, High Bridge, and the Animas River Gorge. Riders are allotted a little over two hours in Silverton to explore before heading back on the train. The rush of the train ride and the breathtaking view make this worth every. single. penny!!!
BOTTOMS UP
For being a small town, Durango’s breweries really come out swinging. While we were there we made it to three of them and didn’t sample a single subpar beer. Steamworks and Carvers are both located in the heart of Downtown Durango. Carvers has a relaxing beer garden in the back of the building, with some funky large-scale outdoor decor. Not only were the beers good, but they have a large soft pretzel that is guaranteed to hit the spot. Steamworks had a line out the door when we walked by, but we were able to snag a couple stools at the bar. You can choose up to six beers for their flights, so we chose a variety and chowed down on some popcorn shrimp (a fantastic post-hike snack!) while we sampled. Animas Brewery is less central to the Downtown hub, but only a mile walk on the aforementioned Animas River Trail and boasts plenty of well-crafted beers. They have some outdoor seating and are family friendly, however don’t be surprised to wait a bit! While we waited, we were able to enjoy some beverages outdoors that feeds off the ambiance of the surrounding park and river.
If you enjoy a well-crafted cocktail, Durango Craft Spirits is a must-try— reportedly one of the best Old Fashioneds Salvador’s ever had! We love a breezy patio, but the experience was made even better by the knowledge AND quality service from the bartender.
GOOD EATS
When we arrived in Durango, we wandered through the downtown area, not overwhelmingly hungry, but peckish for a hearty snack. We knew we had struck gold when we landed upon 11th Street Station. The multi-food truck set-up provides a myriad of options to choose from. With pizza, smoothies, pressed sandwiches, gourmet sliders, poke, salads, sushi, and rolled ice cream, you’re sure to find something. In addition to the food, there is a bar and coffee shop– truly something for everybody! We both enjoyed refreshing smoothies that had us refueled and ready to go walk the Animas River Trail.
We didn’t make it to the Himalayan Kitchen, but we were intrigued by the allure of the Nepalese cuisine. We’d hoped to return and enjoy a meal there, but we simply ran out of time. If you stop in and give it a try, please let us know how it was!
You may think to yourself, “do I really need to stop by a chocolate shop while I’m visiting this pinnacle of outdoor exploration?” and the answer is YES! Run, don’t walk to Animas Chocolate Company. This bean to bar chocolatier creates decadent little chocolate treats. The customer service is above and beyond as someone will walk you through the case of chocolates, explaining each one, while you enjoy a sampler of “sipping chocolate”. It goes without saying the coffee and chocolate chip cookies were also divine.
Our friend’s rehearsal dinner was held at Serious Texas BBQ (the south one!), so we knew the barbecue would be good before we arrived because Tyler (the groom) does not mess around when it comes to good ole southern fixins’. Besides the food, the general atmosphere was far more ethereal than you’d expect for a BBQ joint with live music softly playing, a gorgeous overlook, and twinkle lights strung up over a cozy fire pit.
PARTY VENUE
If you know anyone looking for a stunning, mountainous adobe backdrop to their wedding vows, look no further! The River Bend Ranch Durango delivered magnificent views in spades. As a bonus, there were three paddle boats available to be raced around the pond!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
